David Hicks (Order #16483250)

2nd Edition

George Chrestensen
Scenario Maps: Sven Lugar Design: Nicole Martinez

Front Cover Historical Photos and Document:

U.S. National Archives and Records Administration
Library of Congress, Prints & Photographs Division

Map of Tripoli Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin.

Produced by GHQ, 28100 Woodside Road, Shorewood, MN 55331 U.S.A.

Micro Squad® and Micro Armour® are registered trademarks of GHQ. © Copyright GHQ, 2012. All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................
2.0 DESCRIPTION OF PLAY ..........................
3.0 EQUIPMENT
3.1 Playing Surface ..............................................
3.2 Playing Pieces ................................................
3.3 Charts and Tables .........................................
3.4 Dice .................................................................
4.0 COHESION ..................................................
5.0 SEQUENCE OF PLAY .................................
6.0 SPOTTING ...................................................
6.1 Line of Sight ..................................................
7.0 COMBAT ......................................................
7.1 Basic Principles .............................................
7.2 Combat Results .............................................
7.3 Facing and Range .........................................
7.4 Opportunity Fire ..........................................
7.5 Machine Gun Area Fire ...............................
7.6 Artillery Fire (General) ................................
7.7 Artillery Fire (Direct) ...................................
7.8 Artillery Fire (Indirect) ................................
7.9 Off-Map Artillery ......................................... 11
7.10 Artillery Efficiency ..................................... 11
8.0 MOVEMENT
8.1 Basic Principles ............................................. 12
8.2 Movement Execution ................................... 12
8.3 Requirements and Limitations ................... 13
8.4 Transport ....................................................... 14
8.5 Overrun ......................................................... 15
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
1 8.6 Close Assault ................................................ 15
8.7 Double-Time ................................................. 16
1
9.0 TERRAIN ...................................................... 16
9.1 Wrecks ............................................................ 16
1
1 10.0 SPECIAL WEAPONS
1 10.1 Facing Restrictions ..................................... 16
1 10.2 Dual Purpose Guns .................................... 16
10.3 Personnel Stands ........................................ 17
1 10.4 U.S. Machine Guns .................................... 17
10.5 Weapons Stands ......................................... 17
2 10.6 Armored Cars ............................................. 17
10.7 Infantry Close Support Artillery Vehicles 17
3 10.8 HQ Stands ................................................... 17
3 10.9 Horse Cavalry ............................................. 18
10.10 Bicycle Infantry ......................................... 18
4 10.11 “Land Ships” ............................................. 18
4
5 11.0 ENGINEERING, FLAME THROWERS &
5 FORTIFICATION
6 11.1 Mines ............................................................ 18
6 11.2 Barbed-Wire ................................................ 20
7 11.3 Combat Engineers ...................................... 20
9 11.4 Improved Positions ..................................... 21
9 11.5 Buildings, Walls, and Hedgerows ........... 21
11.6 Flame Throwing Vehicles ........................... 22
12.0 OPTIONAL RULES ................................. 22
12.1 Unit Determination ................................... 22
12.2 The Hot Shot! ............................................. 24
12.3 Intuitive Action .......................................... 24
12.4 Conflicting Orders ..................................... 24
12.5 The Communications Breakdown! ......... 24
12.6 It’s Jammed! ................................................ 24
iii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
12.7 Get Their Guns! ......................................... 24
12.8 Tank Marines! ............................................. 24
12.9 Nobody Moves ‘Til I Say So, Get Me? ..... 25
12.10 Overloading Transport ........................... 25
12.11 Fire Support Allocation .......................... 25
12.12 That’s Going to Leave a Mark ................ 25
12.13 I Got’em In My Sights! ............................ 26
12.14 Pour It On! ................................................ 26
12.15 HEAT It Up! ............................................. 26
12.16 Battlefield Air Strikes .............................. 26
12.17 Big Game Hunters ................................... 28
DESIGNING SCENARIOS ............................. 29
DESIGNER’S NOTES ...................................... 37
BIBLIOGRAPHY ............................................... 40
WEAPONS DATA
Weapons Data Introduction .............................. 43
Finland ................................................................. 44
France ................................................................... 46
Germany .............................................................. 48
Hungary ............................................................... 52
Italy ....................................................................... 54
iv
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Japan ..................................................................... 56
Poland ................................................................... 58
Romania ................................................................ 59
Soviet Union ......................................................... 61
United Kingdom .................................................. 64
United States ........................................................ 67
AIRCRAFT DATA ............................................. 70
MARKERS AND TEMPLATES ...................... 71
COMBAT TABLE CARD ................................. 80
SCENARIOS
Introductory Scenario, Eastern Front 1943 ..... 84
Tamada’s Charge, Mongolia 1939 .................... 86
Heart of Stonne, France 1940 ............................ 88
Easter Break-In, Libya 1941 ............................... 90
Bir el Gubi, Libya 1941 ....................................... 92
Knightsbridge, Libya 1942 ................................ 95
Edson’s Ridge, Guadalcanal 1942 ...................... 97
Kampfgruppe Stachwitz, Russia 1943 ............. 99
The Tobacco Factory, Italy 1943 ........................ 101
Nungshigum Hill, India 1944 ........................... 103
 [1.0] INTRODUCTION
Micro Squad®: The 1:1 Scale Game - WWII is a set of
rules in 1:1 scale for use with 1/285th scale GHQ Micro
Armour® miniatures. It covers tactical armored warfare
in the middle of the Twentieth Century. This period,
between 1939 and 1945, was the most violent in the
history of mankind. It was also the period in which the
most radical innovations in the art and science of
warfare occurred.
Each game of Micro Squad is played in scenarios of ten
to thirty turns. Each scenario will have its own victory
conditions and perhaps a few special rules that apply
only to that scenario. Each game turn represents approx-
imately one minute of real time. One inch on the playing
surface equals approximately twenty-five (25) yards or
meters. Hills and ridges are about five (5) yards in height
per level.
[2.0] GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PLAY
During each game turn, you may move and initiate
combat with your tanks, other weapons, or personnel
stands in order to gain certain victory conditions.
These actions will be regulated by a rigid sequence of
play that allows the game to progress in a smooth and
orderly manner.
[3.0] EQUIPMENT
[3.1] Playing Surface
Unlike a board game, where the playing surface is
provided for you, you create the playing surface in a
miniatures game. This surface may be as elaborate or as
simple as you desire. Keep in mind that terrain features
must be distinct, clearly delineated, and unambiguous.
On no account should they ever interfere with the
smooth flow of play.
[3.2] Playing Pieces
Your vehicle, infantry, cavalry, artillery, and weapon
models should be mounted on one inch by one inch (1"x
1") stands. These stands may be larger than this if neces-
sary, but this should be avoided if possible.
Numbering your stands eases identification. You can note
if this stand is an HQ, a GHQ, or a Forward Observer (FO)
without your opponent knowing their identities.
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Stands represent individual armoured or unarmoured
vehicles, individual weapons and their crews, or squad-
sized units of eight to twelve individual infantry or cav-
alrymen. Models should be mounted so that they clearly
face one side of the stand. Each stand should also be
marked in some way for ease of identification.
In addition to your models, you will require certain
markers to play the game. These are provided for you
and they will indicate wrecks, smoke, artillery impacts,
etc. Their use will be described in the appropriate
sections below. You will also need a yardstick or tape
measure to measure distances of up to 10 feet in inch
increments.
[3.3] Charts and Tables
The various charts and tables included with the rules are
explained in their appropriate rules sections. Please
examine them thoroughly before beginning play as a clear
understanding of their use is crucial to effective play.
[3.4] Dice
Three kinds of dice are required to play the game:
• Twenty-sided die (1D20), used in cohesion rolls
• Eight-sided die (1D8), used for artillery and air
strike deviation
• Six-sided die (2D6), used for initiative and combat
When more than one die of a type is required it will be
abbreviated “X”D6 where “X” is the number of dice to be
thrown. For example: 2D6 means roll two 6 sided dice.
[4.0] COHESION
"Cohesion" is the single most important aspect of play! It
is the very core of Micro Squad. If a stand or group of
stands attempts any sort of task there is generally a
"cohesion roll" associated with that task.
Whenever a cohesion roll is called for, roll a twenty-
sided die (1D20). The number obtained will be subject to
various modifications as explained below in the rules.
When more than one modifier to a cohesion roll is called
for they are all applicable. That is, all modifiers are
 cumulative. The modified roll must be equal to, or less
than, the player's force cohesion level to be successful.
Force cohesion levels are provided in each scenario or
agreed upon by players prior to the start of the game.
Failure has its consequences, and the effects of failure are
discussed in the individual rules section.
During the game, a stand can be in several different
cohesion states:
Normal - The default state at the start of play.
Suppressed - Effectiveness of the stand is reduced. All
cohesion rolls suffer a +4 penalty.
Disorganized - Effectiveness of the stand is severely
reduced. All cohesion rolls suffer a +3 penalty.
Note: A stand can be suppressed and disorganized at the same
time. If a stand is in the suppressed state and a combat result
or other event calls for the stand to be suppressed an addition-
al time it simply remains suppressed. If a stand is disorganized
and an additional disorganization result is called for, the stand
is eliminated instead.
[5.0] SEQUENCE OF PLAY
During each game turn players may move and attack
with all, some, or none of their stands. Performing these
actions within the sequence of play is required without
exception.
1. Initiative Phase - Each player rolls a six-sided die
(1D6) and adds the result to his force cohesion value
(obtained from the specific scenario). The player with
the higher total has the initiative this turn. In the case of
ties roll again.
2. Posture Determination Phase - There are three possible
"postures" a stand may be in: the “movement posture,” the
“fire/move posture,” or the “firing posture.” To determine
posture for the turn, the player who has earned the initia-
tive decides which side must indicate posture first.
Then the players alternate indicating any stands or groups
of stands they wish to commit to movement this turn.
Two Russian light tanks are scurrying up the road. Being
in base-to-base contact, they are a “movement group.”
They have been marked with a green bead to designate
the movement posture.
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
They do this by forming movement groups. A movement
group consists of one or more stands in contiguous contact
that are committing to movement for the turn. All
members of an individual movement group must be in
either the movement posture or fire/move posture.
Each movement group shall be marked to identify its
posture as such. The first player must indicate the com-
position and posture of one movement group before the
other player is required to indicate the composition of
one of his groups. Players then alternate this activity
until all movement groups for this turn have been desig-
nated. Once this is completed all stands not part of a
movement group are automatically in the firing posture.
Note: A player must designate all movement groups
consisting of two or more stands for his side before he may
designate any single-stand groups.
3. Artillery Fire/Air Strike Phase - Players perform
direct artillery fire attacks and execute previously
plotted indirect artillery fire and air strike attacks.
4. Standard Fire Phase - Players alternate attacks. Stands
become suppressed and/or disorganized according to
the Combat Results Table (CRT) and are marked as such.
Stands eliminated according to the Combat Results Table
are removed from play.
5. Joint Plot Phase - Players plot points of impact for
indirect artillery fire to be executed in later turns.
6. Movement Phase - Players alternate attempts to move
their movement groups subject to the rules governing
this process. During this phase “Opportunity Fire”
(section 7.4), “Overruns” (section 8.5), and “Close-
Assaults” (section 8.6) are also conducted.
7. Marker Removal Phase - Players remove any markers
from the playing surface used to denote posture, or that
a stand has fired that turn. Smoke markers and artillery
impact markers are also removed at this time. They then
make a cohesion roll for all stands that are suppressed
and/or disorganized to attempt to “recover” or “rally.” If
the cohesion roll is successful, a suppressed stand has
recovered and it is no longer suppressed. If the cohesion
roll is a (unmodified) 1, a disorganized stand has rallied
and is no longer disorganized. If the stand is both sup-
pressed and disorganized, the stand recovers and rallies.
If the cohesion roll is a (unmodified) 20, the stand has
panicked. A disorganized stand that panics becomes sup-
pressed as well. A suppressed stand that panics becomes
disorganized as well. A stand that is suppressed, disor-
ganized, and panics, is eliminated. The cohesion roll in
this phase for any stand adjacent to a friendly
Headquarter (HQ) stand is modified by minus two (-2).
 Example: "Max" (our typical player) is commanding a weapons chart with a double asterisk (**) on their defense
force of Soviet armor and his cohesion level is 13. On value. Personnel stands block line-of-sight to and from
turn one, one of Max's T-34's is fired upon and receives an other personnel stands. They do not block line of sight to
"S" combat result, becoming suppressed. During the or from any other stand.
Marker Removal Phase of turn one, Max attempts to
recover his T-34 from being suppressed. He rolls a D20
and gets a 10. His cohesion roll is modified by +4 due to
the suppressed state the stand is in, so the modified roll
becomes a 14 (10 + 4 =14). This is 1 point higher than his
cohesion level thus the T-34 fails to recover.

On turn two, Max's T-34 is fired upon again, this time

obtaining an "(S)" combat result. According to the Combat
Results Table, since the T-34 is already suppressed, the
"(S)" result causes Max's T-34 to become disorganized, so
the T-34 is now both suppressed and disorganized.

During the Marker Removal Phase of turn two, Max

attempts to rally and recover his T-34 from being sup-
pressed and disorganized. He makes a cohesion roll on
1D20. One of four things will happen:
• If Max rolls a 6 or less, his T-34 will recover and will no
longer be suppressed. (6 + 3 for being disorganized
and +4 for being suppressed) = 13 (his cohesion level).
Note: The T-34 will still be disorganized.
A German Panther tank, lurking on the edge of the woods,
is considering its options for fire this turn. It has a clear
LOS to the infantry stands, to the halftrack and the lead
Sherman tank, as personnel stands do not block LOS. The
halftrack, however, does block the LOS between the
Panther and the M10 tank destroyer. The best target would
be the Sherman!

• If Max rolls an unmodified 1, his T-34 rallies and
recovers and is no longer disorganized or suppressed.
• If Max rolls an unmodified 20, that T-34 is eliminated
because it is already disorganized and suppressed.
• If Max rolls between a 7 and a 19, nothing changes.
6.1.3 All vehicle stands, mounted cavalry, and moving
motorcycle-infantry stands block line of sight to and
from any stand.
6.1.4 If the LOS is ambiguous, rule in favor of the
defender. If agreed to beforehand by both players, a die-
roll can resolve ambiguous lines of sight.

6.1.5 Terrain blocks LOS as indicated in the Terrain

[6.0] SPOTTING Effects Chart.
Spotting refers to the ability of one stand to "see"
another. Except in the case of indirect artillery fire, a
clear line of sight (LOS) must exist between an attacking
stand and a target stand before an attack may be
attempted on that target. Line of sight may be blocked by
intervening stands and certain terrain. (See Terrain
Effects Chart.)

[6.1] Line of Sight

6.1.1 Line of sight is determined by drawing an imagi-
nary straight line between the center of an attacking or
forward-observer (FO) stand [See "Artillery Fire
(Indirect)" 7.8] and the center of the target stand. This
line may not be blocked in any way.
6.1.2 For spotting and LOS purposes, non-vehicle stands
are divided into two types: personnel and weapons.
Personnel stands include infantry, dismounted cavalry,
mortar, machine gun stands, etc. They are marked in the
Terrain can block line-of-sight (LOS). In this
hypothetical late war desert scenario, the German Tiger I
tank can only see the lead British Staghound armoured
car, visible through the gap in the sand dune (red arrow).
The LOS to the Archer at far left is blocked by the
building, and the trailing Staghound is behind the sand
dune (dash arrows).

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 6.1.6 Terrain occupied by the target stand modifies the
firing cohesion roll. Stands located on the edge of LOS
blocking terrain can be spotted, although with the firing
cohesion roll modifications listed in the Terrain Effects
Chart. However, a stand is always considered to be in
clear terrain for spotting and LOS purposes in any phase
after it has fired.
Note: It is often advisable to wait for an enemy stand in cover
to fire at you before you fire at him. This does not negate the
effect of covering terrain for combat purposes but it does make
spotting it a lot easier!
6.1.7 Maximum sighting distance is usually given for
each scenario as the general terrain in an area; weather
conditions, etc. may affect it. If not specified in the
scenario, maximum sighting distance in "open" terrain is
120 inches, that for "mixed" terrain is 80 inches, and for
closed terrain it is 40 inches. Open, mixed, or closed
terrain is the general state of the terrain on the map.
There are no movement costs, cohesion die-roll effects,
or LOS restrictions associated with them.
6.1.8 Stands gain a five-inch (5") additional sighting
distance for each level of height they occupy above the
level they are spotting, subject to scenario restrictions.
Tabletop terrain should not obscure play, and logic needs
to be applied in all games. Here, two squads of US
infantry are lying in ambush at the edge of a woods,
overlooking a cut in a road. A Panther tank has driven
under the ambush. The stands are considered to be
adjacent, with the infantry at a higher elevation. The
Panther's defense value against any attack made by the
US infantrymen would be at the “top” value of 1.
6.1.9 Adjacent infantry stands have LOS to, and may
target, an armoured vehicle's top armor if they are at a
higher elevation than the target stand.
6.1.10 Air strikes always have LOS.
6.1.11 Adjacent stands have LOS to one another regard-
less of Terrain Effects Chart limitations. Thus, LOS
blocking terrain does not block LOS when stands are
adjacent. However, CRT die-roll modifiers imposed by
the terrain the target stand occupies still apply.
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
[7.0] COMBAT
An attack is defined as the application of the firepower of
one or more stands against the defense strength of a
single target stand.
Each stand taking part in the attack is required to fire
individually. That is, the firepower of two or more stands
may never be combined into a single value. Each "shot" is
called a “combat event” and the results are cumulative
and progressive.
The exact procedure for resolving attacks and combat
events is detailed in the Standard Fire Procedure Chart.
This chart details each step and you must perform all
required steps for each stand in each attack.
There are three kinds of combat that result directly from
movement: “Opportunity Fire” (section 7.4), “Overruns”
(section 8.5), and “Close-Assaults” (section 8.6).
[7.1] Basic Principles
7.1.1 A given stand may be an object of several attacks
during the Artillery Fire Phase and only one attack during
the Standard Fire Phase. If it moves, it may be the object
of one opportunity fire attack during the Movement
Phase. If it passes through "Artillery Impact” zones, it
may be the object of additional artillery fire. If it passes
through machine gun “Beaten” zones (see “Machine Gun
Area Fire,” section 7.5) it is subject to attack by these.
Finally, it may be the object of an overrun (section 8.5) if it
is not an armoured vehicle or a close assault (section 8.6)
whether it is an armoured vehicle or not.
7.1.2 The player with the initiative this turn decides
who executes the first attack of the Standard Fire Phase.
The players then alternate attacks until they both "pass."
At this point, the phase ends. A player may choose to
pass at any time during his turn to attack, but once the
option to pass has been taken, no further attacks may be
made by that player for the remainder of this phase. This
same process is also used during the Artillery Fire Phase.
7.1.3 All stands have two firepower values: one for use
against armoured targets ("AP" value), and one for use
against unarmoured targets and personnel ("HE" value).
7.1.4 No stand may fire more than once per turn.
7.1.5 Stands in fire/move posture have their firing
cohesion rolls modified by +3.
7.1.6 All stands belong to one of three defense classes:
armoured vehicles, unarmoured equipment or weapons,
and personnel. These are identified in the Weapons Data
as follows:
 1. Armoured vehicle defense values are displayed in
brackets “[ ].” Note that armoured vehicles have
separate values for front, side, rear, and top armor.
Some of these values may have both armoured and
unarmoured target values. You must use an attacking
stand’s "AP" firepower value when attacking these
stands armoured values. You must use an attacking
stands "HE" firepower value when attacking these
stands unarmoured values.
This Panzer II F is an
armoured vehicle.
Its defensive values are:
Front [3] Side [2]
Rear [1] Top [1]
3. “(S)” - SUPPRESSED. If the stand is not already sup-
pressed, it becomes suppressed as above. If the stand is
already suppressed, it becomes disorganized as well.
4. “D” - DISORGANIZED. Effectiveness seriously
reduced (long term). Mark the stand with a “D” marker.
+3 to all cohesion rolls. If the stand is already disorgan-
ized when receiving this result, it is eliminated.
5. “E “ - ELIMINATED. Remove from play.
[7.3] Facing and Range
7.3.1 A stand faces in whatever direction the model
mounted on it faces. (See “Playing Pieces,” section 3.2.)
Armoured vehicle stands possess four defense values:
front, side, rear, and top. (See the included “Target
Side” template.)

2. Unarmoured equipment or weapons stands have 1. If fired upon through their forward defensive arc
defense values that are unmarked. You must use during standard fire, they defend using their "front"
an attacking stand’s “HE” firepower value when defense value.
attacking these stands.
2. If fired upon through their side defensive arc
This Red Army 152mm during standard fire, they defend using their "side"
howitzer is an example defense value.
of an unarmoured stand.
3. If fired upon through their rear defensive arc
Its defense value is 3.
during standard fire, they defend using their "rear"
defense value.
4. If fired upon from above during standard fire, they
3. Personnel and light weapons stands are marked defend using their "top" defense value.
with two asterisks (**). Their defense strengths are
halved (rounding down any fractions) if they are The defensive arc is determined by placing the “Target
attacked while in the movement or fire/move Side” template along the side of target stand the line
posture. You must use an attacking stand’s "HE" extending from the center of the firing stand to the center
firepower value when attacking these stands. of the target stand passes through. Ambiguous lines of
fire fall in favor of the defender. Incoming fire that could
This German infantry be from one or two different defensive arcs must be
squad is an example of a applied against the higher of the two defense values.
personnel stand. Its defense
value is 6, which would be
halved if fired upon while
in the movement posture.

Note: Some vehicles may have both armoured and unar-

moured defense values.

[7.2] Combat Results

There are five possible combat results:

1. “--” - NO EFFECT. Self explanatory. Attacking

artillery stands cause an “S” on a “no effect” result.
2. “S” - SUPPRESSED. Effectiveness reduced. Mark
stand with an “S” marker. +4 to all cohesion rolls. If
stand has already suffered a suppressed result this turn,
treat as “no effect.”
Two French vehicles want to shoot at the German Panzer
IV D. The Renault R-39’s 37mm gun has an AP attack
value of 4, and will be applied against the PzIV D’s front
defense value of 4 (white arrow). The Panhard 178
armoured car (AP of 3) gets to shoot at the side defense
value, which is also 3 (black arrow).

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 7.3.2 To calculate range: measure the distance from the
center of the firing stand to the center of the target stand.
Find that distance on the appropriate range line of the
Range Effects on the Combat Die-Rolls Chart and cross-
reference the effect on the attacker's combat die-roll.
7.3.3 Stands with an "^ " symbol in the Weapons Data
may only fire through their front arcs. Stands with an
"^^" symbol in the Weapons Data may only fire through
their rear arcs. Use the “Firing Arc” template provided
in the marker set to define a stand's front or rear firing
arc. These stands may fire at adjacent targets outside the
arc using the firepower and range data for the infantry
HQ unit appropriate for their nationality. This represents
the use of small arms by weapon crews.
Two German AFVs are engaging two British Grant tanks.
The turreted German panzer (#32) may fire at either
Grant, but the StuG III D, which must use the Front
Firing Arc, may only attempt to fire at the Grant on the
right (red arrow). The dashed arrow shows how the LOS
does not cross the FFA template.
7.3.4 Stands that are adjacent are at one-inch range (25
yards/meters).
7.3.5 Stands adjacent with an enemy along one-half or
more of either stand are engaged. Engaged stands may
not fire on anyone but those stands with which they
are engaged.
The German infantry squad #16 and the Soviet T-34/85
are engaged and must not fire upon any other enemy
stand. German infantry squad #12 is not engaged with
the tank, since less than half of its stand’s edges are in
contact with the Russian stand.
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
7.3.6 No stand may exceed its maximum firing range.
[7.4] Opportunity Fire
7.4.1 Opportunity Fire (OF) takes place during the
Movement Phase. Only those stands that are in the firing
posture and have not fired during the Standard Fire Phase
may execute this type of attack. On-board artillery stands
that have not fired during the Artillery Fire Phase may
also execute this type of attack using direct fire only. A rea-
sonable amount of time must be given to allow an
opponent to make a decision to fire or not. When a move
is completed, the opponent must be alerted to that fact and
this is his last chance at opportunity fire against that stand.
7.4.2 It is enemy movement that triggers opportunity
fire. OF may occur as soon as a target stand begins to
move. That is, as soon as your opponent touches the
stand to move it, it may be fired on.
7.4.3 Procedure:
1. The moving player is told to stop moving the stand.
2. The OF player resolves an attack as in the Standard
Fire Phase.
If the result is "no effect," the owning player may
continue moving the stand. An "S," "(S)," or "D" result
forces the owning player to make a cohesion roll for the
stand. Success allows it to continue moving. Failure
forces the stand to stop where it is.
7.4.4 A stand may suffer an OF attack once only per
movement phase but, as in the Standard Fire Phase, that
attack may come from multiple stands.
[7.5] Machine Gun Area Fire
Stands with ">" next to the “Weapon Type” in the
Weapons Data may produce (or "lay down") "beaten”
zones. Any unarmoured stand in such a zone at the
beginning of a Movement Phase, or that moves into or
through one, is vulnerable to attack by the stand produc-
ing that zone.
7.5.1 To lay down a beaten zone, a stand must be in the
fire posture at the start of the Standard Fire Phase and
make a successful cohesion roll. The stand may not
perform any other type of fire during the phase per
section 7.1.4.
7.5.2 A particular stand's beaten zone corresponds to its
"front" firing arc only. (Use the "Firing Arc" template
provided in the marker set to define the limits of the
zone.) The maximum range of any Beaten zone is twenty
(20) inches.
7.5.3 All unarmoured stands not already suppressed,
in a beaten zone and within the line of sight of the stand
that laid down the beaten zone are automatically
suppressed.
 7.5.4 All unarmoured stands not already suppressed that
enter a beaten zone within the LOS of the stand that laid
down the beaten zone during the movement phase are
also automatically suppressed. In addition, the owning
player must make a successful cohesion roll (with the
“suppression” effect applied) if he wishes that stand to
continue moving. Failure forces it to stop where it is.
7.5.5 Stands occupying concealing terrain can still be
caught in a beaten zone, as long as a line of sight can be
traced to them.
Three German infantry squads have been advancing
through the woods at left. When the lead squad became
visible at the edge of the woods, a Polish cavalry MMG
support stand established a beaten zone (gray shaded
region). The lead German stand is immediately
suppressed, and those following will also be suppressed
if they move out of the woods.
Example: An infantry stand at the edge of a wooded area
(capable of firing out of the woods) can be caught in a
beaten zone. In this case, the player who has established
the beaten zone makes a cohesion die-roll (with +4
cohesion roll modifier for terrain.) If the cohesion roll is
successful, the infantry stand is considered to have been
spotted and is subject to the beaten zone. A stand’s
beaten zone may always and only extend to places
where normal fire is possible. (As a rule of thumb; you
may fire at any stand if it can fire at you, remembering to
account for various terrain penalties. If a stand is pre-
vented from firing out of a particular piece of terrain, it
cannot be fired at.
7.5.6 Beaten zones are established as an attack per rule
7.1.2 and players are free to attempt to establish them at
any time they are allowed to make an attack with a given
stand during the Standard Fire Phase.
Note: Beaten zones supersede the rule that says that no stand
may be attacked more than once in a phase. Beaten zones are
considered to be continuous fire, impacting on the beaten zone
throughout the turn. Any stand that is in or passes through
any number of beaten zones is susceptible to attack by the
stands producing such zones.
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
[7.6] Artillery Fire (General)
As listed above in the "Sequence of Play," artillery
weapons fire in their own separate phase. This is due to
the fact that artillery weapons are separate and distinct
from other weapons. The power of artillery comes from a
combination of shell weight and rate of fire. When
artillery weapons fire, they do so for the entire turn. All
stands (friend or foe) passing through the target zone of
such weapons during the movement phase, as well as any
stand in the target zone at the beginning of the Artillery
Fire Phase, suffer the full effect of that weapon's fire.
Artillery weapons include field guns, howitzers,
mortars, multiple-rocket weapons, etc. In Micro Squad,
artillery stands generally represent an individual gun
and its crew and delivers one impact marker per stand.
Stands representing light and medium mortars (45mm -
82mm) may be organized as sections containing
anywhere from 1 to 4 tubes.
Example: A mortar section of 60mm mortars would be
listed as “60mm (3)” (i.e. the section contains three
60mm mortars and would deliver three 1"x1" impact
markers). When sectioned together in this manner, they
behave as if brigaded (section 7.6.10).
All artillery weapons are capable of direct fire. Only
those indicated with the "#" symbol in the weapons
charts may conduct "indirect fire."
The terrain occupied by the target stand does not modify
artillery firing cohesion rolls, including battlefield air
strike bomb and rocket attacks. The terrain occupied by
the target stand does modify the firing cohesion rolls for
battlefield air strike strafing attacks (see “Battlefield Air
Strikes,” 12.16). The CRT die-roll modifiers imposed by
the terrain of the target stand apply to all artillery fire.
Off-map artillery fire is always indirect fire (section 7.8).
 7.6.1 Indicate artillery fire by placing impact markers on
the playing surface (or map) during the Artillery Fire
Phase. These markers remain on the map throughout the
current turn. The size of the impact marker is dependent
on the caliber of the firing stand:
45mm - 60mm: 1" x 1"
65mm - 90mm: 2" x 2"
100mm - 155mm: 3" x 3"
170mm and larger: 4" x 4"
7.6.2 The minimum effect of an impact marker is
"suppression." Treat all "no effect" CRT results as "sup-
pressed" instead.
7.6.3 If a stand occupies the spot where an impact
marker is to land, place the impact marker under the
stand. This stand is attacked at the full attack value of the
firing artillery unit.
If more than one impact marker strikes the same spot (as
in a closed sheaf or attacks by more than one artillery
stand), the defender may suffer more than one combat
result roll.
Note: An impact marker may strike more than one stand.
When in doubt, the players should decide which of the possible
targets will receive the most coverage and adjust the position-
ing of the marker accordingly. An impact marker cannot affect
a stand unless it covers at least 50% of it. If the placement of
the marker and the stands it affects cannot be reasonably deter-
mined by both players, roll a die to determine whether a stand
is affected or not.
3"x 3" and 4"x 4" impact markers possess 1 square inch and
2 square inch "full effect" zones respectively. Stands that are
not covered by at least 50% of a "full effect" zone have a +3
die-roll modifier applied to the combat die-roll. 1"x 1" and 2"x
2" impact markers are full effect over the entire marker.
7.6.4 All stands meeting the requirements of section
7.6.2 are subject to attack regardless of nationality.
Artillery shells strike friend and foe alike!
7.6.5 Stands that pass through an artillery impact
marker during the subsequent Movement Phase are
subject to attack as well. At least 50% of the stand must
pass over the marker for the stand to be affected. A stand
may be affected by any number of impact markers
during the Movement Phase. Each impact marker it
encounters will affect it.
Note: An artillery attack is considered to be continuous fire,
impacting on the target zone throughout the turn. The
presence or absence of stands in the target area at the moment
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
the fire commences is irrelevant. A stand passing through
multiple impact zones is susceptible to attack each time it
passes over an impact marker.
7.6.6 Although the effects of artillery fire are simultane-
ous, artillery attacks take place alternately, by initiative,
in the same manner as attacks in the Standard Fire
Phase. Damage incurred by an artillery stand before it
gets to fire must be taken into account.
An artillery stand might be eliminated, suppressed, or
disorganized by enemy artillery fire before it gets to
shoot. These will affect its firing cohesion roll and may
prevent it from shooting.
7.6.7 Impact markers block LOS as indicated in the
Terrain Effects Chart. Stands may trace LOS into and out
of an impact marker as long as the stand is at the edge of
the impact marker.
The cagey German player had planned an ambush,
stationing an infantry squad and a 7.62 (r) anti-tank gun
to flank any Soviet forces that might skirt the hill.
Fearing just such a trap, the Red Army player ordered an
81mm mortar smoke barrage, which did not deviate and
has effectively blocked the LOS for the German troops
(and for the Russians, too).
7.6.8 Artillery weapons may opt to deliver a smoke
screen rather than fire. The same sheaf patterns"are
used. Smoke markers are removed during the marker
removal phase. Only those stands which have an "S"
next to the “Weapon Type” in the Weapons Data may
deliver smoke.
Smoke has the following effects:
• Smoke "suppresses" like normal artillery fire.
• Close-assaults and overruns may take place in smoke.
• Smoke is a type of terrain and blocks line of sight.
Like impact markers, you may fire into them, but
not through them.
• Stands firing both into and out of smoke suffer
firing cohesion roll penalties. This is in addition to
the suppression effect on stands "in" smoke (see
Terrain Effects Chart).
 7.6.9 If an artillery stand suffers close-assault or is
engaging enemy stands at less than the artillery stand’s
"minimum" range, they must use the same firepower
and defense values as their army's infantry HQ stands.
7.7.4 Mortar stands only must roll for deviation when
executing direct fire (see section 7.8).
7.7.5 Artillery firing cohesion rolls are modified by
terrain; “suppression,” “disorganization,” etc. as in fire
during the Standard Fire Phase.

7.7.6 Artillery stands conducting direct fire ignore CRT

“Range” modifiers.

[7.8] Artillery Fire (Indirect)

“Indirect fire” occurs when artillery weapons cannot
themselves "see" the target. These weapons may be
placed on the playing surface (on-board) or located off
the playing surface (off-board). Indirect artillery fire has
its fire directed onto a target it by a Forward Observer
(FO). In each scenario’s "order of battle", certain stands
It could be a rough day for the crew of this German
will be indicated as being capable of acting as an "FO."
sIG 150 gun. They fired earlier this turn (noted by a
red bead), but are now being close-assaulted by two
stands of American infantry. The German stand will
defend using the standard German infantry defense
value of 6, rather than the gun’s defense value of 2.

7.6.10 Artillery stands in contiguous contact and

belonging to a particular company or battalion may be
brigaded (grouped) together and make a single firing
cohesion roll. Likewise, off-map artillery stands
purchased in two or three gun sections or whole
batteries may be grouped together in the same manner.
All United States and British (post January 1944) off-
board artillery stands may be brigaded together to (Section 7.8.3) The Germans are coming! Infantry and
reflect superior American and British artillery doctrine. artillery cover the bridge and town, and an armored force
is racing for the crossing. The French player fired an 81mm
The impact markers of brigaded artillery stands must mortar attack (2 markers in an open sheaf) at the bridge.
form a single sheaf pattern (either closed or open) and The first cohesion roll succeeded, but the second - for
roll for deviation as if it were a single stand. A “closed deviation - failed! Here the “Deviation” template has been
sheaf” pattern has all impact markers land one on top of centered on top of the bridge. The French player rolls the
each other. An “open sheaf” pattern has all impact dreaded D8 to see where the mission really went ...
markers land in contiguous contact. All impact markers
of an open sheaf pattern must be in the LOS of one of the
firing stands or the Forward Observer (section 7.8)
including the blocking effect of any impact marker
within that sheaf.

7.6.11 Infantry close support artillery vehicles are the

only artillery weapons that may fire and move in the same
turn. These vehicles are listed in the Weapons Data.

[7.7] Artillery Fire (Direct)

7.7.1 Direct artillery fire does not have to be plotted
in advance.
7.7.2 Artillery stands must have a clear line of sight to
the target as in fire during the Standard Fire Phase.
7.7.3 Artillery requires a firing cohesion roll as in fire
during the Standard Fire Phase.
.... and rolled a 3! 2D6 were then rolled, with the result
of 8. The two 2” x 2” impact markers were placed near the
curve of the stream. The impacts landed on top of the
covering force, so the infantry stand was placed on top of
the impact markers. The infantry stand is automatically
suppressed and must roll on the Combat Results Table to
see if there are additional effects of the mortar barrage.

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 These stands must have a clear line of sight to the poten-
tial target during both the Joint Plot Phase and Artillery
Fire Phase and may be in the fire, fire/move, or
movement posture. If they are eliminated at any point
during the turn the plot is cancelled.
7.8.6 Multi-turn missions are considered continuous fire
from turn to turn, and as such, impact markers are not
removed in the Marker Removal Phase except for the last
turn of the mission. Smoke laid down by a multi turn
mission lingers until the entire mission is complete.

7.8.1 Forward observers obey all LOS rules as if they 7.8.7 Below are some guidelines for plotting indirect
themselves were firing. artillery fire. Use the “Artillery Plotting” sheet provided
in the rules set. This will allow players to easily perform
7.8.2 Indirect fire arrives several turns after the turn it is the steps listed below.
plotted based upon the nationality of the artillery stand
per the “Artillery Efficiency” rules (section 7.10). 1. Record the I.D. of the firing unit.
2. Record the I.D. of the forward observer (FO) stand.
7.8.3 First, an artillery cohesion roll must be passed in
the turn the indirect fire is scheduled to arrive. For on- 3. Record the turn of impact.
board stands this roll is modified by any suppression
4. Record the location of impact: In order to obscure
and/or disorganization of the stand. For off-map fire
your intent from your opponent, you may want to use
there are no modifiers to an artillery die-roll. It is based
standard military notation for this purpose, often
only on the cohesion level of the side directing the fire. If
referred to as "Right-and-Up." You begin at the lower
this roll fails, the indirect fire does not arrive. If the roll
left hand corner of the map as you face it. You then
succeeds, you must determine whether that fire
count “X” inches to the right (of the left edge) and “Y”
"deviates" from the plotted target. To do this, another
inches up (from the bottom). This results in a standard
artillery cohesion roll is necessary. If this roll is success-
four-digit grid coordinate (i.e. 0426 - 4" Right/26" Up,
ful the fire lands on the intended target as planned.
2321 - 23" Right / 21" Up, or 4516 - 45" Right/16" Up).
If the deviation cohesion die-roll fails, roll 1D8 and
compare the result to the "Compass Rose" template
provided. This provides the direction of deviation,
(direction "1" being toward the "enemy" board edge.)
Rolling 2D6 gives the distance in inches the impact
marker deviates from the original target location. E

7.8.4 In order to avoid repeated artillery cohesion rolls,

you may plot artillery fire for a duration of two or more
turns in length. If you succeed in making your artillery D
cohesion roll for a "duration" fire mission, subsequent
attacks in that mission do not require a new roll. You
might wish, however, to cease fire before a mission is C
complete. For example, it may become a danger to
advancing friendly troops!

In this case you would have to make a successful

cohesion die-roll one turn prior to the turn in which you B
wish to terminate the mission. A successful roll termi- A
nates the mission. If the roll fails, the mission continues
although further attempts made be made in subsequent
turns. Termination of such missions requires a forward
observer (FO) that has a clear line to any of the missions
impact or smoke markers. Any HQ or GHQ stand may
serve as an FO stand for this purpose.
Max pre-registered five points before play began:
7.8.5 Deviation of multi-turn missions is done as a
Farm house “Alpha” - A Bridge “Delta” - D
whole. If in the first turn the fire arrives is on target, no
further deviation rolls are required in subsequent turns. Town Center “Bravo” - B Cottage “Echo” - E
If the fire deviates, a new deviation cohesion roll may be Hill #143 “Charlie” - C
attempted each turn to attempt to get the fire on target.

10

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 In addition, to further obscure your intent you may
pre-measure the coordinates of various geographical
features (i.e. Village - 0426, Bridge - 2321, Hill - 4516).
You can then give these targets code letters if you like
(i.e. Target Alpha, Target Bravo, etc.). These are
commonly called "pre-registered" targets. Once you
have noted these pre-registered targets you can use
them to plot fire either directly to them, or relative
to them.
Example: Before the start of the game, Max measures
and notes 5 target locations. He calls these “Alpha”,
“Bravo,” “Charlie,” “Delta,” and “Echo.” He notes the
“Right and Up” coordinates of each of them. Now at
any time he is able to plot fire he can note that he is
plotting fire to any of these locations without actually
remeasuring his intended target. He may also
designate fire relative to any of these locations by
noting something similar to "6E of A,” which would
mean 6 inches east of Alpha.
5. Next note the sheaf pattern you wish to use and a
note as to direction an open sheaf is to be laid out.
"0426/Closed" means a closed sheaf centered on
0426. "2321/Open (E-2)" means an open sheaf with
2 impact markers starting at 2321 and going east
1 inch. "4516/Open (NW-3)" means an open sheaf
starting at 4516 and extending 2 inches toward
the northwest.
6. Finally, you should differentiate between HE
and smoke missions. HE is the default if you
fail to designate an ammunition type for a specific
artillery mission.
Example of a full plot notation:
It is the Artillery Plot Phase and Max is ready to plot
his fire. He has a section of (3) 60mm mortars. On a
piece of paper, he notes the following: "HE Open 5N
of B E-3". This means he wants High Explosive in an
open sheaf with (3) 1” x 1” impact markers starting
north of pre-registered Target Bravo and extending
east for 2 inches.
7.8.8 Artillery stands conducting indirect fire ignore
CRT “Range” modifiers.
7.8.9 Indirect artillery fire missions pre-plotted to arrive
on the first turn of a scenario do not require forward
observers to direct their fire. Nor do they require a
cohesion roll for deviation per 7.8.3. The artillery firing
cohesion roll per 7.8.3 is still required. This is intended to
represent that spotting for and registration of artillery
was accomplished prior to the start of the scenario. Such
missions may be multi-turn missions per 7.8.4 and termi-
nation of such missions requires a forward observer that
11
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
has a clear line to any of the missions impact or smoke
markers. Any HQ or GHQ stand may serve as an FO
stand for this purpose.
[7.9] Off-Map Artillery
In most cases artillery support will be close enough to
be effective but too far away for the weapons to be
visible on the playing surface. Off-map artillery repre-
sents this. The scenario order of battle will indicate the
presence of off-map fire support.
7.9.1 All off-map artillery fire is indirect-fire.
7.9.2 Off-map artillery requires successful cohesion die-
rolls both to successfully arrive and prevent deviation.
7.9.3 The maximum range of off-map artillery units is
reduced by 10%. Off-map artillery range is measured
from any point along controlling player's board edge.
[7.10] Artillery Efficiency
Each major combatant in this period had its own
artillery doctrine and standard practices. Of these,
those of the United States were the most advanced and
effective. Artillery fire arrives several turns after it is
successfully plotted (both on-board and off-board
artillery) depending on nationality as follows:
1. American indirect fire arrives three (3) turns after
the turn in which it is plotted
2. German indirect fire arrives six (6) turns after the
turn in which it is plotted.
3. British and Commonwealth indirect fire performs
like German fire until January of 1944. After that, it
performs like American fire.
4. Other countries indirect fire, including the Soviet
Union, France, and Italy, must be plotted before the
game begins. This means that their indirect fire
for an entire scenario must be plotted after the
terrain is placed and before forces are deployed.
If the Americans or post-January ‘44 British are attack-
ing, their indirect fire for the first three turns must be
plotted before the game. If the Germans or pre-January
‘44 British are attacking, their indirect fire for the first
six turns must be plotted before the game. This means
that their indirect fire must be plotted after the terrain
is placed and before any forces are deployed.
For any side that must have all of their artillery fire
plotted prior to the start of the game, all procedures of
indirect artillery fire (described in sections 7.8.3
through 7.8.6) apply.

[8.0] MOVEMENT
[8.1] Basic Principles
8.1.1 Movement is initiated by a movement group (as
established in the Posture Determination Phase) but is
executed by individual stands one at a time. A stand
moves based on its own movement value, terrain effects,
and cohesion.
8.1.2 A movement group is defined as one or more
stands, in base contact, and in the movement posture or
fire/move posture. The individual stands of a
movement group are subject to a single cohesion die-
roll in order to move.
8.1.3 Once a movement group has been designated, all
the component stands of that group are in the movement
posture or fire/move posture throughout the turn,
whether or not they actually move. It is very important
that you designate movement groups clearly and unam-
biguously during the Posture Determination Phase.
[8.2] Movement Execution
8.2.1 Before movement begins, each player may deter-
mine how many movement orders his GHQ may issue
for the turn. To do this each player must roll 2D6 and
add the command value of his GHQ stand. The GHQ
command value is assigned as part of the scenario. Look
up the sum on the Command Efficiency Table. This gives
the number of movement orders each player may issue
this turn.
8.2.2 If the GHQ stand is eliminated, that player may no
longer issue movement orders for the rest of the game.
Note: This does not mean that you cannot move if the GHQ
stand has been eliminated. See rule 8.2.6.
8.2.3 To execute ordered movement, the movement
group must pass a cohesion roll. This roll applies to the
entire movement group, but the roll must pass for any
individual stand for it to move. The cohesion roll for
12
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
movement is modified by +4 for any stand in the group
that is suppressed and it is modified by +3 for any stand
that is disorganized.
The cohesion roll for an entire movement group is
modified by minus two (-2) for each HQ or GHQ stand
it contains. As for any type of cohesion roll, die-roll mod-
ifiers are cumulative. If the cohesion roll is passed by
some stands, but not all, those in the movement group
that have passed may move and leave those stands that
have failed behind. This will result in the formation of a
new movement group or groups.
Movement Example: Max forms a 3-stand movement
group in the Posture Determination Phase. One stand is
an HQ tank, one stand is a suppressed tank, and the
third tank is a suppressed and disorganized tank. The
force cohesion level for Max is established as 14 for the
scenario. Max rolls cohesion to attempt to move the
movement group. He rolls a 12. The HQ tank has a
modified 10 and may move. The suppressed tank has a
modified 14 and may also move. The suppressed and
disorganized tank has a modified 17 and may not move.
Max may move the two tanks that have passed leaving
the tank that has failed behind.
Max decides he does not wish to leave this stand behind
and does not move the group. He still uses one movement
order for the turn. He may attempt to move the group
again using another order or wait and try for independent
movement (section 8.2.6). Had he chosen to move the two
stands allowed, the remaining stand still could attempt to
move again that turn by expending another movement
order or attempting independent movement.
Max’s three-tank movement group: the stands are all in
base-to-base contact, so the single green bead denotes
that the group is in the movement posture. The white
beads indicate that the first and last stands in the group
are suppressed. The black bead on the lead stand
indicates the tank’s disorganized status.
8.2.4 The player with the initiative decides who attempts
movement first in each turn. If a player elects not to move
a movement group when it is his turn to do so, he has
waived all rights to further ordered movement. Players
alternate attempts to move movement groups using
movement orders until all movement orders have been
expended or each player declines movement once.
 Note: You are never forced to move a stand simply because it
is in the movement posture. Actual movement is voluntary.
8.2.5 You may attempt ordered movement for any
movement group as many times as you like, but each
attempt expends one movement order. This means that if
you fail the cohesion roll to move a movement group on
your first attempt, you may try again and again as long
as you continue to expend a movement order for each
attempt. Each attempt is considered a separate
movement action. Your opponent must be allowed a
movement action of his own before you attempt moving
a movement group a second or third time.
8.2.6 After all movement orders for a side are expended
you may attempt independent movement. Any
movement group that tries to move without a movement
order is attempting to move on its own initiative or
"independently." Only one attempt is allowed per
movement group per turn and this attempt imposes a +3
die-roll modifier. Players alternate attempts at independ-
ent movement just like they do for ordered movement
until they each player declines movement once or all
stands have attempted independent movement.
8.2.7 You must complete all ordered movement before
you are allowed to attempt any independent movement.
There is no limit on the number of independent moves
that may be attempted in a turn, but only one attempt
may be made per movement group.
8.2.8 Movement orders may not be accumulated from
turn to turn. Unused orders are lost at the end of the turn.
Reminder: You may attempt to move a group any
number of times with orders but only once independent-
ly. The effects of HQ's and ordered and independent
movement are detailed in the Movement Orders Chart.
[8.3] Requirements and Limitations
8.3.1 Each stand may execute movement once per
movement phase by expending up to its total
movement value. This value may not be exceeded and
unused movement points may not be accumulated
from turn to turn.
8.3.2 Stands in the Fire/Move (FM) posture may expend
up to one-half of their movement allowance (rounded
down). If a stand in the fire/move posture does not fire,
it is still restricted to one-half (rounded down) of its
movement allowance.
8.3.3 Stands move across the playing surface, inch by
inch, expending movement points per inch as they do.
13
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
A stand may not enter or cross terrain without sufficient
movement points remaining to do so.
A section of two French 75mm guns has left the road and
headed cross country. The movement allowance for the
halftrack prime movers is 16T (for tracked). They moved
5 inches on the “good” road, using 2.5 movement points.
The woods abut the road. It costs 3 points per inch for a
tracked vehicle to drive through the woods. The lead
vehicle has travelled 4.5 inches into the woods, as far as
possible this turn.
8.3.4 A stand allowed to execute movement may always
move a minimum of one inch regardless of terrain
penalties as long as it avoids impassable terrain.
8.3.5 There are three movement classes: Wheeled (W),
Tracked (T), and Foot (F)
The Terrain Effects Chart covers how various terrain types
affect the movement of stands belonging to each class.
8.3.6 Friendly stands may pass freely through one
another, but no two stands may end the Movement
Phase overlapping. If a stand is forced to halt where it
would violate this rule, move it back along its previous
path until there is room for it.
8.3.7 Armoured vehicles may pass freely through
enemy "transport" stands or other "unarmed" enemy
vehicles and enemy "non-vehicle" stands only while con-
ducting overruns (section 8.5).
8.3.8 An armoured vehicle may pass through an enemy
armoured vehicle stand only if it makes a successful
cohesion roll (to test its nerve) with a +3 die-roll modifier.
The stand must first move adjacent, then stop, and make
the cohesion roll. If the roll fails, the moving stand must
remain adjacent.
8.3.9 Any stand may change facing without cost while
moving. In addition, any stand in the movement posture
may change facing as a movement action, even if it
executes no other movement.
 8.3.10 Stands having a movement value of "(0)" with a
cargo cost of eight (8) or less may change facing during
the movement phase. In this way, a "towed" weapon may
change facing. Stands having a movement value of "(0)"
may not change facing and fire in the same turn.
8.3.11 Stands with no combat value (i.e. unarmed
stands) may never voluntarily end their move adjacent
to any enemy stands.
8.3.12 Vehicles may perform reverse movement (i.e.
with no change in facing) a maximum of 4 inches per
turn, or up to 25% of their movement allowance,
whichever is less.
[8.4] Transport
Transport vehicles are those that display a “transport
capacity" in the Weapons Data. They may be used to
transport other stands. Stands capable of being trans-
ported will show a “transport requirement" on the same
list. Note that mounted cavalry stands may not be trans-
ported. While being transported, stands are referred to
as "cargo." The joining of transport and cargo is called
"mounting." The separation of transport from cargo is
called "dismounting."
8.4.1 One vehicle stand may transport one weapon or
equipment stand and/or any number of personnel stands
up to its cargo capacity.
8.4.2 In order to mount, the cargo and transport
stands must be touching and both be in the movement
posture at the beginning of the movement phase.
Mounting any number of personnel stands onto a trans-
port stand costs both the transport stand and each
personnel stand 50% of their movement allowance for
the turn.
8.4.3 Mounting a weapon stand onto a transport stand
uses up the entire movement allowance for both trans-
port stand and weapon stand in a given Movement
Phase, and will require a varying number of turns to
mount the weapon depending on the transportation
requirements of that weapon.
2-4 points
transport requirement: May move next turn
5-10 points
transport requirement: May move in 2 turns
11-12 points
transport requirement: May move in 4 turns
13 + points
transport requirement: May move in 6 turns
14
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
8.4.4 A cohesion roll is required for any attempt to
mount. Failure prevents mounting taking place that
turn, and no further attempts may be made by the stand
attempting to mount that turn. The transport stand may
have other personnel stands make mounting attempts.
Success requires the player to remove personnel stands
from the board and place towed weapon stands behind
the transporting vehicle. A side record must be main-
tained as to which personnel stands are in which trans-
port stand.
8.4.5 When firing on a transport stand that is towing a
weapon, "range" may be measured to either the trans-
port stand or the towed weapon stand for sighting or
firing purposes. The two stands are considered a
combined unit.
Use the defense and movement value of the transporting
stand. Any combat result suffered by the transport stand
is also suffered by any transported cargo stands,
whether personnel or weapons.
8.4.6 To dismount cargo, a vehicle must be in the
movement posture. The act of dismounting any number
of personnel stands costs the transport stand and each
personnel stand 50% of their movement allowance for
the turn.
Note: A transport stand with movement points remaining
may move after dismounting. Personnel stands may move
after dismounting as well. The act of dismounting a towed
weapon stand costs the transport stand and weapon stand
their full movement allowance for the turn.
Dismounted stands are placed on the map adjacent to
the transport stand. Dismounted stands are in the
movement posture and may take any facing the owning
player prefers.
8.4.7 Weapon stands which dismount must remain in
the movement posture for a specific number of turns
depending on the transportation cost of the weapon.
2-4 pt. transport May assume firing posture
requirement: next turn
5-10 pt. transport May assume firing posture
requirement: in 2 turns
11-12 pt. transport May assume firing posture
requirement: in 4 turns
8.4.8 Stands in the process of mounting or dismounting
are vulnerable to opportunity fire as this counts as
movement.
 8.4.9 Cargo stands may not fire while being transported.
Armed transport vehicles may fire with cargo on board.
8.4.10 Unless specifically prohibited by a scenario rule,
any stand may begin a scenario mounted to any legal
transport stand. A weapon stand with a transport cost of
13 or more may never begin a scenario mounted.
[8.5] Overrun
Overrun is a “contest of discipline” where an attacking
armoured vehicle stand must maintain its formation and
the defending non-armoured stand must avoid scatter-
ing in panic. This must be done in spite of the chaos that
results when an armoured vehicle careens around in the
midst of hostile infantry! Overruns occur when an
armoured vehicle stand moves through an enemy non-
armoured stand. Armoured vehicle stands themselves
can never be overrun. Armoured personnel carriers may
perform overruns only when carrying personnel and
nothing else. They may not do so if they are towing
equipment or if they are running "empty". Overruns can
result in negative effects including elimination to both
the attacker (the overrunning stand) and the defender
(the stand being overrun).
8.5.1 An armoured vehicle executing an overrun must
move so that it passes through the target stand and lands
adjacent to it. It is not necessary to pass straight across
the target and land on the opposite side. The vehicle
need only pass through any portion of the target stand
and land anywhere adjacent, including the direction
from which it came. The act of overrunning a stand pins
that stand in place, preventing the defending stand from
disengaging by moving away from the overrun even if it
has not yet attempted movement. All stands intending to
execute an overrun against a single target must be
moved before any of the overruns are resolved.
(Section 8.5.2) German infantry squad #141 is having a
bad day. Five American recon vehicles, Greyhounds and
Stuart tanks, are in the middle of trying to overrun them!
But it could be worse: 3 more ‘slots’ are available (where
shown by black arrows) for other Americans to join in the
mayhem!
15
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
8.5.2 The maximum number of vehicle stands capable of
overrunning a single target stand is eight, filling all the
space around the target stand when movement is
complete. If the target stand is in the firing posture or
fire/move posture, it may perform opportunity fire on
one overrunning vehicle. This may be done as the
vehicle passes over the target. In this case, the range is 0.
A stand that is attacked while executing an overrun at
range 0 defends with its lowest defense value.
8.5.3 If an overrunning stand is eliminated at range 0,
the overrun still takes place.
8.5.4 To determine the outcome of an overrun, consult
the Overrun Procedure Chart and follow all the steps
in order.
[8.6] Close-Assault
Close-assault is a “contest of wills” in which the
assaulter(s) must overcome the natural desire to avoid
closing with the enemy and the defenders must overcome
the natural urge to flee before they are overwhelmed!
8.6.1 Only infantry or cavalry stands may conduct
close-assault.
8.6.2 In order to close-assault, a stand must end the
movement phase adjacent to an enemy stand, be in the
movement or fire/move posture, and have at least one
unused movement point remaining. When ending
movement adjacent to an enemy stand, the desire to
attempt a close-assault must be declared at that time. If
it is not declared, the pinning effects of section 8.6.4 do
not apply. A stand may be subject to close-assault from
more than one assaulting stand.
8.6.3 The steps involved in conducting a close-assault
are listed in the Procedures Chart. Every step must be
performed in the prescribed order. Results incurred in a
given step apply to subsequent steps. For instance, if a
defending stand manages to suppress or disorganize an
assaulting stand, those effects apply to the assaulting
stand when it rolls for cohesion.
 8.6.4 The target of the close-assault may perform the
defensive response detailed in the procedure, whether it
fired or not in the Artillery or Standard Fire Phase. But it
must be in the fire posture at the time of the close-assault
to conduct this defensive response. If the target is a
weapon stand with restricted facing limits, and the
attacker is moving in from any direction except the front,
the defender may use the appropriate firepower and
defense values of the infantry HQ stand for its national-
ity to conduct the defensive response. If close-assaulted
from the front, the weapon with a restricted field of fire
may use its own combat values.
8.6.5 The act of close-assaulting a stand pins it in place.
It is not allowed to disengage by moving away from the
assault even if it has not yet attempted movement. An
exception to this is a stand that is disorganized as a result
of a close-assault must move 1 inch away from the
assaulting stand. If it was subject to close-assault from
more than one stand, it moves away from the stand that
caused the disorganized result.
8.6.6 Close-assaulting stands might themselves become
the object of close-assault. All close-assaults are conduct-
ed after all movement has taken place. When more than
one close assault must be resolved, players alternate
completing assaults. The player with the initiative
decides who goes first.
8.6.7 Armoured vehicles subjected to close-assault
defend with their lowest defense value.
8.6.8 Terrain effects are ignored in close-assault.
8.6.9 Mounted cavalry stands may not close assault
stands occupying any building or medium or heavy
improved position. Mounted cavalry stands double their
printed combat value when close-assaulting but only if
the defender is not an armoured vehicle.
[8.7] Double-Time
Personnel stands in the movement posture that are not
suppressed and/or disorganized may conduct double
time movement. Stands that employ double-time
movement may move up to 150% of their normal
movement allowance (round down any fractions).
Stands conducting double-time movement suffer the fol-
lowing effects:
1. They must make a cohesion roll after their
movement is complete. If they fail this die-roll, they
are suppressed. If they are suppressed during
movement there is no effect for failing this roll other
than that described below.
2. They may conduct close assaults that turn, but only if
the cohesion roll for double-time movement is passed.
16
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Failure of this cohesion roll prohibits any close assault
by that stand.
[9.0] TERRAIN
The terrain in an area and certain terrain edges may alter
the cost of moving through them. These costs are
detailed in the Terrain Effects Chart. Terrain may also
affect firing cohesion rolls and spotting. These effects are
detailed in the Terrain Effects Chart.
[9.1] Wrecks
Whenever an armoured vehicle is removed from play,
replace it with a wreck counter. Wreck counters provide
cover for stands placed on them. See the Terrain Effects
Chart for details.
[10.0] SPECIAL WEAPONS
[10.1] Facing Restrictions
Certain stands (like assault guns) must obey facing
restrictions. That is, they may fire only into their front-
arc or rear-arc as defined by the “Firing” template. They
may not fire at any target outside this arc under any cir-
cumstances. See the Weapons Data for details as to stand
with restricted arcs of fire.
[10.2] Dual Purpose Guns
10.2.1 The German 88mm, the Italian 90mm, Soviet
85mm AA guns performed in two roles, both as AA guns
and AT guns. The US 90mm (from mid-1943 on) and
British 3.7" (94mm) guns could have been used in this
manner and did on occasion fire at ground targets in
self-defense, but doctrinally were not put in the role of
anti-tank guns like the other German, Italian, and Soviet
units. In a given turn they may fire either as anti-aircraft
guns or against ground forces. When checking range
effects use the following table for this weapon instead of
the regular Range Effects Chart.
2” or less: -2 to combat die-roll
2” to 4”: -1 to combat die-roll
5” to 32”: +0 to combat die-roll
Each additional 32”: +1 to combat die-roll
10.2.2 The British 25lbr. and Soviet 76.2mm Model
1936 are dual-purpose weapons which are handled dif-
ferently from other field artillery. In a given turn they
may fire either as artillery weapons using the artillery
rules, or they may be used as anti-tank guns at the
players' discretion.
These guns both had reliable direct-fire sights and were
supplied with effective armor-piercing ammunition. But
it was doctrine that really makes these weapons different.
 Both the UK and Soviet forces deliberately deployed
these guns in the anti-tank role and gun crews were
trained accordingly. The Weapons Data includes the
necessary specifications for the guns in either role.
[10.3] Personnel Stands
The defense value of personnel stands is halved
(rounded down: i.e. mounted cavalry round to a defense
of 2.) when they are in the movement posture or
fire/move posture. Personnel stands are marked in the
Weapons Data with a double asterisk (**).
[10.4] U.S. Machine Guns
American .30 cal and .50 cal machine guns mounted on
jeeps and halftracks may be dismounted at the owning
player's discretion. The American player must be the
defender in either a hasty attack or prepared attack
scenario to be eligible to dismount vehicle machine guns.
For every two .30 cal dismounted machine guns he
receives one MMG stand. For every two .50 cal
dismounted machine guns he receives one HMG stand.
These MMG and HMG stands count towards his
battalion unit point total (see the Scenario Design rules.)
The decision to remove jeep and halftracked mounted
machine guns must be made prior to the start of
the scenario.
Two American Jeeps dismount their machine guns at the
beginning of a hasty attack scenario. This has “created”
MMG stand #16.
[10.5] Weapons Stands
Weapons stands represent individual anti-tank guns, anti-
aircraft guns, etc. These stands can sight and fire over
intervening personnel stands (section 6.0). They are gen-
erally not armoured, though they may be mounted on
armoured vehicles, in which case they take on the defense
class of that vehicle (the U.S. M3 GMC is an example).
If their defense value (as listed in the Weapons Data) has
no brackets ([ ]) they are unarmoured stands. Stands
firing on unarmoured stands may use only their HE
attack value. Small or light weapons stands that defend
as if they were personnel (marked in the Weapons Data
with a double asterisk “**”) are still considered
"weapons" stands for firing and sighting purposes.
17
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
[10.6] Armoured Cars
Armoured cars are much like tanks. The main difference
being that they are wheeled vehicles rather than tracked
ones. As such, stands overrun by armoured cars do not
suffer the +3 cohesion roll penalties as indicated in the
Overrun Procedure Chart.
[10.7] Infantry Close Support Vehicles
Infantry close support artillery vehicles were used by
only a few countries. They are identified in the Weapons
Data with their own classification. They behave in all
ways like artillery with two exceptions:
• They do not use impact markers. Their fire is directed
at an individual stand and does not continue throughout
the turn.
• They may not fire at less than -3 combat differential.
However, like other artillery weapons "no effect" results
on the CRT are treated as "S" results instead.
[10.8] HQ Stands
The HQ stand is used to represent the company (or
equivalent) command in the game. GHQ's are typically
designated when a force contains one or more battal-
ions, but a minimum of one GHQ is required per side
regardless of force composition, unless specified in
the scenario.
10.8.1 Scenario designers should assign one HQ for
each company or smaller sized unit in the scenario. An
HQ stand is used for this at the printed cost listed in the
Weapons Data section plus the cost modifier listed in the
Scenario Design section of the rule book.
10.8.2 In particularly large games multiple GHQs per
side may be specified. GHQs are represented by an HQ
stand at the printed cost listed in the Weapons Data
section plus the cost modifier listed in the Scenario
Design section of the rule book.
10.8.3 A GHQ's quality value (+ or -) is a direct die-roll
modifier to the Command Efficiency Table, thus influenc-
ing the number of movement orders available each turn.
10.8.4 GHQs are the source of movement orders for a
force in play. If a player's GHQ is eliminated or leaves
the board, that player may no longer issue movement for
the rest of the game for the effected command.
10.8.5 If one or more HQ or GHQ stand is part of a
movement group, each HQ and/or GHQ provides a -2
cohesion die-roll modifier to the movement cohesion
roll, regardless of its quality.
 10.8.6 The recovery/rally cohesion roll during the
Marker Removal Phase for any stand adjacent to a
friendly headquarter HQ or GHQ stand is modified by
minus two (-2). HQ/GHQ stands affect the recovery roll
only. The rally roll must be an unmodified one (1).
[10.9] Horse Cavalry
Although the Second World War is regarded as the first
truly mechanized war, most nations still employed a
significant number of mounted troops.
Note: Horse cavalry may begin a scenario either mounted or
dismounted at the owning players discretion. This optional
rule will allow players to explore both the strengths and weak-
nesses of horse cavalry on the modern battlefield.
10.9.1 Mounted cavalry stands double their printed
combat value when close-assaulting but only if the
defender is not an armoured vehicle.
10.9.2 Mounted cavalry stands may not occupy build-
ings or any fortification. Mounted cavalry stands may
not close-assault stands occupying any building or
medium or heavy improved position.
10.9.3 Dismounted cavalry stands are treated as regular
infantry stands. However, one (1) shall be subtracted from
their HE firepower (to reflect the need for "horse holders").
10.9.4 To dismount a cavalry stand must be in the
movement posture. The act of dismounting a cavalry
stand costs 50% of its movement allowance for the turn.
The mounted stand is replaced by an infantry stand and
a horse stand is placed in base contact with the infantry
stand. The infantry stand and horse stand remain in the
movement posture and may continue to move after dis-
mounting as long they have movement points remaining.
10.9.5 Horse stands are treated as personnel stands
with no firepower value, a defense value of 5**, and a
movement value of 3F.
18
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
10.9.6 To mount, an infantry stand and a horse stand
must be touching and in the movement posture at the
beginning of the movement phase. Mounting cavalry
costs both the horse and infantry stand 50% of their
movement allowance for the turn.
10.9.7 Mounted cavalry may not perform standard or
opportunity fire. Hence, they may not be placed in the
fire/move posture.
[10.10] Bicycle Infantry
Bicycle infantry were featured in many nations' forces
throughout the war. These troops could move faster than
“foot” infantry along roads and tracks. But they were
slower and more limited than either cavalry or motorcy-
cle borne soldiers.
10.10.1 Bicycle infantry remain classed as “foot”
movement type stands. They may spend up to 4
movement points as a wheeled stand each turn if they
move exclusively on any type of road or track.
Otherwise, they may spend up to 4 movement points
each turn as foot mobile stands.
10.10.2 Bicycle infantry are normally treated as foot
infantry for all sighting purposes. They immediately
and automatically dismount and perform as foot
infantry in all combat situations including close
assaults. They may not use their bicycle movement
points to conduct close assaults.
[10.11] “Land Ships”
Tanks with multiple turrets or weapons (such as the M3
Grant/Lee, Char B1, and the T-35, etc.) have firepower
and range values, as well as restrictions or notes listed
for the various weapons they were equipped with. Only
one weapon may be fired per turn and that weapon must
adhere to any specified restrictions unique to its use.
For Example: The M3 Grant may only fire its hull
mounted 75mm gun at a target in the forward firing arc
template, while its 37mm turret gun may designate a
target in any direction. But only one may 'fire' during
a turn.
[11.0] ENGINEERING, FLAME THROWERS,
AND FORTIFICATION
[11.1] Mines
There are two types of minefields: anti-personnel and
anti-tank. There are three minefield densities: “Hasty,”
“Standard,” and “Concentrated.” The players should
determine which types and densities are available and
in what numbers before the scenario begins. Consult
the Scenario Design rules for minefield deployment and
availability. Minefield attacks are resolved directly on
 the Combat Results Table at the combat differential 11.1.4 Once a stand moves onto a mine marker, it
indicated below based on the density of the minefield. must cease moving for the remainder of that phase and
may not move off the mine marker until the next
• Hasty -2 movement phase. If a stand moves onto 2 minefields
• Standard +1 simultaneously, the owner of the stand shifts the stand
so that it is only in contact with (and thereby effected
• Concentrated +7
by) one of the minefields.
11.1.1 Anti-personnel mines attack both personnel and
unarmoured vehicles. Anti-tank minefields attack both
armoured and unarmoured vehicles. However, the fol-
lowing vehicles are unaffected by anti-tank mines: U.S.
Jeeps, German Kubelwagens, and Soviet GAZ Jeeps.
The defense value of a defending stand has no bearing
on minefield attacks. The stand is attacked on the
Combat Results Table at the appropriate combat differ-
ential without regard to the target stand (except as indi-
cated above.)

After skirting behind the cover of a sand dune ridge,

this pair of Royal Artillery 25 pounders had hoped to
slip through the gap in the dune. If they continue into
the minefield, their forward movement will cease and
on the next turn a cohesion roll at a +3 modifier will be
required to move and either pass over the dummy
marker, or suffer a mine attack.

11.1.5 Any attempt to move off a mine marker requires

a successful cohesion roll with a +3 penalty. If the
cohesion roll is successful, the owning player of the
minefield must inform his opponent whether the marker
represents an active minefield or a "dummy." If the mine-
field is a "dummy," it is removed from play for the
remainder of the game. If it is an active minefield, the
moving player undergoes a mine attack as he leaves the
11.1.2 Mines are deployed as part of the initial setup minefield. The type and density of the minefield is
when called for by a scenario. Each minefield marker revealed and the owning player rolls 2D6 to obtain the
covers a 1" x 1" area and shall display a clear identifying result on the Combat Results Table.
number. Anti-tank and anti-personnel minefields may be
stacked together. Minefields of the same type may never If the result is “no effect,” the owning player may
be stacked one above another. continue moving the stand. An "S," "(S)," or "D" result
forces the owning player to make a cohesion roll for the
11.1.3 For each active minefield marker, one or more stand. Success allows it to continue moving. Failure
"dummy" minefields may be deployed. The actual forces the stand to stop on the minefield. If the stand is a
number is based on the player's force cohesion level: vehicle, an “E” results in a “wreck” marker being placed
on the minefield.
The number of dummy minefields deployed may be less
than the number allowed, but never more. Note: It is possible to leave one minefield and immediately
enter another.
# of Dummies per
Force Cohesion Level 11.1.6 Vehicle stands (except U.S Jeeps, German
Active Marker Kubelwagens, and Soviet GAZ Jeeps) that successfully
11 or less 0 move through an anti-personnel or anti-tank minefield
have effectively breached the minefield. Any minefield
12 - 14 1 markers these stands successfully move through are
15 or more 2 removed from play. Any stand that successfully moves
through an anti-personnel minefield has effectively

19

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 breached the minefield. Any anti-personnel minefield
marker these stands successfully move through is
removed from play.
11.1.7 Stands may pass unscathed through "friendly"
minefields. They must, however, pay the appropriate
movement for the terrain that the minefield occupies,
stop, and pass a cohesion roll to continue moving.
Failure of the cohesion roll results in no further
movement for the stand that turn.
[11.2] Barbed-wire
"Barbed-wire" markers are deployed as part of a player's
initial forces.
11.2.1 Any stand moving onto a barbed-wire marker
must pay the additional movement points for its
movement class and may not move further that phase.
Running through an industrial area, a German flamm
halftrack comes upon a barbed wire roadblock between
two buildings. To end this turn on the wire, he must
have 4 movement points remaining (2 inches at “good
road” @ .5 movement points each, and the +3 to get into
the barbed wire).
11.2.2 To move off a barbed-wire marker a cohesion
roll must be passed with a +3 modifier.
The halftrack crew wants to get on with it! On the turn
after stopping on the barbed wire marker, the German
player makes a cohesion roll to move forward. His
force’s base cohesion level is 15, and it takes a +3
modifier to get out of the wire roadblock. “Max” rolls
a 7 +3 = 10, so the flamm halftrack can move forward.
Since the stand is tracked [T], the barbed wire has
been crushed....
20
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
11.2.3 Whenever a tracked vehicle successfully moves
off a barbed-wire marker, that marker is removed
from play.
...so the marker is removed. Two squads of infantry that
are following the halftrack through the industrial
complex will not have to deal with the barbed wire.
[11.3] Combat Engineers
Combat engineers are much like other infantry stands.
However, their training includes a familiarity with
explosives and the destruction of fortifications.
Their equipment includes incendiary weapons (especial-
ly flame throwers), explosives, and mine clearing equip-
ment. This results in their having special abilities.
11.3.1 When performing a close assault, engineer
stands have an additional -3 modifier to their combat
results rolls.
11.3.2 Engineers may "clear" minefields, spending a
full turn on the mine marker and performing no other
action that turn to accomplish this. The engineer must be
in the firing posture. A successful cohesion roll at the end
of the turn with a +3 modifier reduces the minefield type
by one level. Concentrated minefields are reduced to
standard minefields. Standard minefields are reduced to
hasty minefields. Hasty minefields are removed. Failure
leaves the minefield as it was.
11.3.3 Engineers may clear barbed wire using the same
procedure as for minefields. When attempting to clear
barbed wire treat it as a hasty minefield. Failure leaves
the barbed wire as it was.
11.3.4 Engineer stands may attempt to breach walls
and light or heavy buildings. This is accomplished by the
engineer stand spending a turn adjacent to the wall or
building and performing no other action that turn. The
engineer stand must be in the Fire posture during this
turn. A successful cohesion roll at the end of the turn
breaches the wall and a "breach" marker is placed next to
the affected section of wall or building. A "breach"
 marker negates all terrain effects of that section of wall
or building. Failure leaves the wall or building as it was.
[11.4] Improved Positions
There are three types of improved positions: “Light,”
“Medium,” and “Heavy.” Improved positions are placed
in 1” x 1” sections and are placed on the playing surface
as part of a player's initial forces per the Scenario Design
rules. Improved positions may never be moved during
the game. See the Terrain Effects Chart for the effects on
movement, firing cohesion, combat die-rolls, and LOS.
the position and occupying stand. The position's "per-
sonnel" die-roll modifier (7) is used as its defense value
in this instance. All other results only affect the stand
occupying the improved position.
11.4.4 Weapons firing at medium or heavy improved
positions may use their "AP" value rather than their
"HE" value at their discretion. In this instance, the
improved position's defense is equal to its "personnel"
die-roll modifier.
11.4.5 A stand initially deployed in a medium or heavy
improved position may not change facing. If it does, it
loses all benefits of this position. It may change back to
its original facing and regain these benefits.

[11.5] Buildings, Walls, and Hedgerows

During the initial set-up before play begins, “Max”
decides to place a Medium Improved Position in an
overwatch position above and about 8” (200 meters) from
the end of the bridge. This can then be used during the
course of play to try to stem any enemy movement across
the bridge.
11.5.1 Only armoured tracked vehicles and personnel
stands may cross hedgerows. Vehicles that cross
hedgerows assume an armoured value of [1] at the
instant of crossing. If no opportunity fire is declared on
the stands it crosses, the armoured value reverts to
normal and movement continues. This reflects the
increased vulnerability of these vehicles exposing their
thin belly armor.

11.4.1 Light improved positions may be eliminated by

artillery fire. An impact marker must cover at least half of
an improved position marker and achieve an “E” result
on the Combat Results Table. Such artillery attacks effect
both the position and occupying stand. The position's
“personnel” die-roll modifier (4) is used as its defense
value in this instance. The light improved position
marker is then removed from play. All other results only
Norman bocage (hedgerows) were a serious problem
affect the stand occupying the improved position.
for Allied forces after the D-Day beaches were finally
cleared. Here a US Stuart tank, fitted with a Cullin
11.4.2 Medium improved positions may be eliminated hedgerow device, is attempting to breach a hedgerow.
by artillery fire. An impact marker must cover at least The blue bead notes that the vehicle is in the
half of an improved position marker and achieve an “E” fire/move posture.
result on the Combat Results Table. Such artillery attacks
effect both the position and occupying stand. The
position's "personnel" die-roll modifier (5) is used as its
defense value in this instance. The medium improved
position marker then becomes the equivalent of "Rough
Terrain 1." All other results only affect the stand occupy-
ing the improved position.

11.4.3 Heavy improved positions may be eliminated

by artillery fire. An impact marker must cover at least
half of an improved position marker and achieve an “E”
result on the Combat Results Table. Record this result. A
second "E" result in a subsequent turn eliminates the Our Stuart has entered the field beyond the hedgerow
heavy improved position and it becomes the equivalent and a “breach” marker has been placed where it blasted
of "Rough Terrain 2." Such artillery attacks effect both through the wooded embankment. That space is now
“Open Terrain” for both movement and firing purposes.

21

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Hedgerows may be breached by armoured vehicles
equipped with the Cullin hedgerow device. Such
vehicles retain their listed armoured values at the instant
of crossing and, if the vehicle successfully passes
through the hedgerow, a "breach" marker is placed next
to the affected section of hedgerow. A "breach" marker
negates all terrain effects of that section of hedgerow.
Tanks equipped with Cullin hedgerow devices cost an
additional 10 points per stand.
11.5.2 Tracked vehicles with a frontal armoured
defense of [2] or greater may attempt to breach rein-
forced walls or heavy buildings. Such stands must pass
a cohesion roll to breach. Armoured vehicles with a
frontal armoured defense of [4] or less suffer an addi-
tional +3 to their required cohesion roll. Failure to pass
disorganizes the affected stand, fails to create a breach,
and ends its movement for that turn. If successful, a
“breach" marker is placed next to the affected section of
wall. A "breach" marker negates all terrain effects of that
section of wall or building. Any armoured vehicle auto-
matically breaches wood fences and light buildings.
11.5.3 Tracked vehicles with a frontal armoured
defense of [2] or greater may attempt to breach road-
blocks. Such stands must pass a cohesion roll to breach.
Failure to pass disorganizes the affected stand, fails to
create a breach, and ends its movement for that turn. If
successful, the "roadblock" marker is removed from play.
[11.6] Flame Throwing Vehicles
Some vehicles are designated as "flame thrower" types.
These should not be confused with the man-packed
flame throwers used by combat engineers. They are
special purpose high-pressure types mounted on
tracked vehicles.
11.6.1 Whenever one of these weapons fires, the
defender must pass a successful cohesion roll. Failure
requires the defender to retreat at the end of the phase.
This retreat must be at least one inch (1”) and place the
defender a minimum of one inch (1”) farther away from
22
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
the flame thrower than it started. If this is not possible,
the defender is eliminated.
11.6.2 If one of these vehicles performs an overrun, the
defender suffers an additional +3 penalty to its required
cohesion roll.
[12.0] OPTIONAL RULES
These are optional rules that add authenticity, and a bit
more complexity, to the game. Both players must agree
to any of these that will be used before the game begins
unless specifically invoked by a scenario rule.
[12.1] Unit Determination
Few battles are fought until one side or the other is com-
pletely annihilated. At some point, the basic human
survival imperative generally takes over and ends things
before that happens. Alternately, the troops may be
willing to continue resisting the enemy beyond their
commander's willingness to sacrifice them. Either way,
the action dies down quickly once a formation's “break
point” is reached. Detailed rules for “force determina-
tion” were excluded from the standard game in the inter-
ests of brevity and simplicity. For those of you who wish
for a greater level of realism (requiring greater complex-
ity), these are presented below. Their use is optional, but
highly recommended.
A given formation's “determination level” is based on
the percentage of casualties that formation can sustain
before self-preservation asserts itself. Extensive research
done by nearly all the participants in World War II has
yielded a remarkably consistent estimate of 35% as the
maximum number of casualties a given formation can
sustain without suffering a substantial reduction in effi-
ciency. Although many actions continued well beyond
this level of casualties was reached, nearly all sources
agree that once a formation falls below 65% of its
original strength, its ability to operate effectively drops
dramatically! Of course, much of this research involved
was done after the war had ended, so it was not reflect-
ed in tactical doctrine during the fighting.
Be that as it may, the basic truth of the matter remains
unchanged. Once a formation falls below 65% strength,
its contribution to the overall effort is generally greatly
reduced. The basic 35% determination level may be
modified to reflect special conditions, but this should
be done sparingly and only with the consent of all
players involved.
Note: Changing the determination level will make a big differ-
ence in the way a game is played. For example, both the Soviets
and Germans at Stalingrad fought with great courage and
savagery. The determination levels for both sides should reflect
this, rising to as much as sixty or even seventy percent.
 However, bear in mind that any formation that continues
fighting until it is down to thirty or forty percent of its
original strength will require a great deal of time to replace
that strength (and train these replacements). Failing to do this
will mean the formation will be unreliable in combat for the
foreseeable future. The term “brittle” is often used to describe
units in this condition, unable to bear further strain.
12.1.1 To introduce force determination, you will need
a standard poker deck of 52 playing cards for each GHQ.
Remove the Jokers before play. The values of numbered
cards are their face values (aces count as one). Picture or
“face” cards have the following values: Jack - 11, Queen
- 12, King - 13.
12.1.2 Ascertain the total number of combat stands
under a player's direct control, including off-map
artillery etc. Combat stands must be armed. (Trucks,
tractors, etc. with no firepower value do not count.) HQ
and GHQ stands count as two stands for this purpose.
12.1.3 Multiply this total by the force determination
level expressed as a decimal and multiply the result by
7 (the average value of a card), rounding to the nearest
whole number. This number is the formation's
“breaking point.”
Example: A Commonwealth formation consisting of
32x infantry and tank stands, 2x HQ stands, 1x GHQ
stand, and 15x unarmed transport stands has a break
point of 93. 32 (32 infantry and tank stands x1) + 6 ( 1
GHQ and 2 HQ stands) + 0 (15x0) = 38; 38 x .35 (35%) x
7 = 93.1 (93).
12.1.4 Whenever a stand in the formation is eliminated
for any reason, draw a card from the deck. Draw two
cards if the eliminated stand is an HQ or a GHQ. You are
not required to show them to your opponent and may
show them to another player on your own side if you
wish. When the total value of the cards in your posses-
sion exceeds your breaking point, your formation has
reached a crisis of command and is broken. The com-
mander of the formation’s primary concern is now pre-
serving the lives of as many of the men under him as
possible (not to mention his own career). At this point,
you must reveal the cards for that to all players.
Example: The player above loses 13 stands. He draws
the following cards: 5, 3, Queen, 9, 7, 2, King, 8, 6, 1, 7,
Jack, and 10, for a total of 94. This last card puts him over
his breaking point. Had he drawn a 9, he would have
accrued 93 points. Close, but not close enough!
12.1.5 On the very next turn after reaching its breaking
point the following conditions are in effect:
23
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
1. The force cohesion value of the broken formation is
reduced by five (5) for all purposes except movement
for the rest of the game.
2. Stands in the broken formation may only fire if fired
upon that turn unless they are within 8 inches of an
enemy stand. They may only fire at those enemy units
within 8 inches.
3. Off-map artillery belonging to the broken formation
may complete any multi-turn missions. No further
indirect-fire may be plotted for that formation.
4. Any unused air strikes assigned to that formation
are cancelled.
5. The force cohesion value of the broken formation is
increased by two (2) for movement purposes for the
rest of the game.
6. Stands belonging to the broken formation must
move toward a "friendly" map edge, as agreed to by
the players and must use their full movement
allowance if possible.
7. Posture determination for stands in the broken
formation does not take place. These stands are
assumed to be in the movement posture and must
attempt movement even if they have fired during
the Standard Fire Phase.
8. When all formations under one sides control have
broken, the opposing side must make a successful
cohesion roll each ensuing turn to continue fighting.
This die-roll is modified by +2 for each additional turn.
Once the opposing player fails to make this roll suc-
cessfully, the game is over. Everyone has ceased fire.
Example: The Commonwealth player in the example
above reaches his breaking point on turn 8. On turn 9 the
Axis player rolls against his force cohesion level of 17
and gets a 14, allowing play to continue. At the begin-
ning of turn 10, the Axis player makes a cohesion roll
and gets a 16. Adding 2 to this result (for the one turn
since the opposite side had broken) yields 18, exceeding
his force cohesion level. The scenario is over. Had he
rolled a 14 the scenario would have continued (14 + 2 =
16). On turn 11, had he rolled another 14, he would add
4 yielding an 18 and the scenario would be over.
12.1.6 In games where one side includes two or more
GHQs, The forces under the control of each separate for-
mation are assigned separate break points.
12.1.7 More than one formation may reach its breaking
point in the same turn.
 12.1.8 All players must reveal their cards at the end of
the game regardless of whether anyone reached their
break point.
12.1.9 The casualty percentage sustainable by a specific
force in a specific battle is a difficult thing to pin down.
The random element of playing cards keeps both sides
guessing as to the precise moment when breaking will
occur. For example, both sides in a given scenario may
have a determination level of 35%. However, the random-
ness provided by the cards can result in one side's losses
actually totaling forty or even fifty percent of its total
strength without it suffering any debilitating effects.
Below, you will find some suggested modifications to the
basic 35% Determination Rule, based on troop quality
and situation.
Any force defending in an “Assault” scenario +5
Any force beginning a scenario at 75% or less
-10
of it full TO&E strength
Soviet force defending in any scenario dated
+5
November '41 or later
Any force in 1939 or 1940 facing enemy armor -10
Any Soviet force before September 1941 -10
Any force taking part in a “Meeting
-5
Engagement”
Any “Green” or “Militia” force attacking -10
Any Japanese force +10
Japanese force defending Pacific Island +5
Italian force attacking -5
Any U.S. force in North Africa during 1942 -5
Any U.S.M.C. force in Pacific Theater +10
Any Attacker in a “Reconnaissance in Force”
-5
scenario
Any Soviet force in 1944 +5
Any Soviet force in 1945 +10
[12.2] The Hot Shot!
If, when a player makes a firing cohesion roll, he rolls a
natural (i.e. unmodified) “1,” it means that this stand has
achieved a "remarkable" success. Shift the attack two
columns to the right on the Combat Results Table before
determining combat results.
If the firing unit is an artillery stand (mortars included)
and the target unit is an armoured vehicle, the column
shift does not apply. Instead, the unit is attacked using
24
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
the vehicles top armor. British 25lbr. and Soviet 76.2mm
stands firing in the ATG mode are treated as non-
artillery stands if they achieve a "Hot Shot."
[12.3] Intuitive Action
Whenever a "group" attempts to move, you must make a
cohesion die-roll. If you roll an unmodified "1," the leader
of this group has "intuitively" anticipated your intentions
and got moving on his own initiative. Therefore, any
order expended for this group is not used after all. You
may use it again to assist another group to move!
[12.4] Conflicting Orders
Whenever a movement group attempts to move, it must
make a cohesion roll. If the roll is an unmodified "20," the
leader of this group has received conflicting orders and
is in doubt about his superiors intentions. Therefore, this
movement group may not move and may not attempt to
move for the remainder of the turn.
[12.5] The Communications Breakdown!
If a player makes an artillery cohesion roll (section 7.8.3)
for deviation of artillery fire, and he rolls an unmodified
"20," it means there has been a serious error in fire direc-
tion control. The fire deviates 4D6 inches from the
original plotted target!
[12.6] It's Jammed!
If, while making the necessary firing cohesion roll for a
vehicle, weapons stand, or MMG stand to fire or estab-
lish a beaten zone (see rule 7.5 “Machine Gun Area
Fire”), the player rolls an unmodified "20," there has
been a serious malfunction with the stand's weapons.
The stand becomes suppressed and the attempt to fire or
establish the beaten zone has failed.
[12.7] Get Their Guns!
If a machine gun stand is either eliminated or forced to
retreat due to a close assault, one of the successful close
assaulting stands may capture the weapons and become
a machine gun stand itself. The stand attempting to
capture the weapons must make a special cohesion roll
with a +3 modifier.
If this roll is successful (meaning the captured the guns
are both intact and functional), the stand becomes a
machine gun stand of the same type as the original
stand. If the close assault does not eliminate the stand
losing the weapons, the retreated machine gun stand
becomes a standard infantry stand.
[12.8] Tank Marines!
Players may use armoured fighting vehicles (AFV) stands
as transport. The AFV stand has a transport capacity of
eight (8) points. Any combat result suffered by the AFV
 forces any personnel stands to dismount immediately and
the dismounted stand becomes suppressed.
The transported stand may be attacked separately from
the AFV. In this case, the defense value of the transport-
ed stand is "1" (unarmoured).
If the AFV fires during any phase of the turn, the owning
player may automatically dismount the personnel stand
with no expenditure of movement points to the AFV and
50% of the transported stands movement points. If he
wishes the personnel stand to remain on the AFV, he
must perform a special cohesion roll with a +3 modifier.
[12.9] Nobody Moves 'Til I Say So, Get Me?
In the standard rules, players alternate moving
movement groups at the option of the player with initia-
tive. If either player opts to "pass," it means that he
wishes the other player to move first.
Under this optional rule, however, a player may declare
a "stand fast" action during the ordered movement
portion of the Movement Phase. This simulates the
GHQ broadcasting an order to all troops under its
command to hold their present positions until receipt of
further instructions.
A "stand fast" action requires the expenditure of a
movement order. If the player passes a cohesion roll with
no modifiers, he may pass the movement requirement to
his opponent. If he fails, he must select a movement
group and move it. There is no limit to the number of
stand fast actions that may be attempted other than the
maximum amount of movement orders allowed for a
given turn.
Example: You have won the initiative and opt to pass
first move to your opponent. He moves one of his
movement groups. It's now your turn to move a
movement group, but you want to see more of what your
opponent will do first. You use a movement order, pass
the cohesion roll, and now may postpone moving any of
25
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
your groups until your opponent moves another of his
groups, thus committing himself before you do. Use of
this rule reflects how a force with better leadership can
take advantage of the greater flexibility and freedom of
action it bestows.
[12.10] Overloading Transport
Vehicles may never exceed their transport capacity when
carrying weapons/equipment. However, They may do so
when transporting personnel only.
This simply means that more vehicles have been added
to the unit (to carry the extra men). In this way, "Bren
Carriers" may transport one infantry stand. However,
they may not tow heavy howitzers.
[12.11] Fire Support Allocation
A glance at the Weapons Data will show that the point
cost for many artillery weapons is enormous. Often, the
point cost for a full battery is prohibitively high in small
games. In addition, historical references often show the
use of these weapons restricted due to huge ammunition
consumption, conflicting priorities, or other similar diffi-
culties. Therefore, off-map artillery support may be pur-
chased by the turn rather than for the whole game.
12.11.1 Use of off-map artillery may be purchased per
turn by dividing the point cost found in the Weapons
Data by the number of scenario turns.
12.11.2 You must still make all required cohesion rolls
and, if these rolls fail, the use of that weapon(s) will be
lost (but only for that game turn).
12.11.3 Note that the use of off-map artillery weapons is
not limited to consecutive turns.
Example: Four turns of a battery of six 105mm howitzers
is purchased for a scenario. This fire may be used a
single battery at a time, on game turns two, three, six,
and nine.
Two batteries may be plotted for use on game turns two
and three. In fact, all of the shots (24 howitzers) may be
plotted in the same turn, for a short massive barrage!
[12.12] That's Going to Leave a Mark!
U.S. and British tank and anti-tank guns were issued
limited numbers of HVAP and APDS shells. Beginning in
September 1944 such weapons of 57mm caliber or larger
may be equipped with this ammo, raising their AP fire-
power by 50% (rounded down). Stands with this capacity
cost 10% more than their standard counterparts (rounded
up). However, because supplies of this ammo were
limited, it is possible that the special supply of ammo will
be depleted. Any time one of these stands makes a 2D6
 die-roll on the CRT and the roll is a 2, 3, 4, or 5, the supply
of special ammo is exhausted. The shot still counts as
having been special ammo, but the supply of special
stand has been exhausted for the remainder of the
scenario and the stand reverts to its standard firepower.
Mark the stand in some way, or note on a side record.
[12.13] I Got'em In My Sights!
Stands that have attempted to fire at an enemy non-per-
sonnel stand during the preceding turn receive a -2 die-
roll to their firing cohesion roll if they attempt to fire on
the same enemy stand. This bonus is lost if the targeted
stand moves through terrain which blocks line of sight to
the firing at any time between the two shots.
[12.14] Pour It On!
Vehicle and weapon stands in the firing posture that suc-
cessfully perform anti-tank fire on an enemy vehicle
stand may attempt to fire again that turn. To succeed on
an attempt at a second attack, the stand must pass a
second firing cohesion roll with an additional +3
modifier. If this second attempt is successful, a third
attack may be attempted. To succeed on attempt at a
third attack, the stand must pass its firing cohesion roll
with an additional +6 modifier. As long as the attempts
continue to succeed, further attempts are made with an
additional +3 modifier for each attempt.
Stands in the fire/move posture may attempt to fire
again that turn, but each of these attempts are made with
an additional +6 modifier for each attempt. A stand suc-
cessful in firing more than once in the same turn must
restrict its additional fire to its original target until that
target is eliminated. After that is accomplished, it may
attempt to acquire another target.
Note: This optional rule will slow play and should only be
used for smaller scenarios.
[12.15] HEAT it up!
After January 1941 Germany equipped units with the
75mm L24 cannon (Pz IVa-f1, Pz IIIn, StuG IIIa-e, SdKfz
233, 234/3, 251/9, 250/8 and the 75mm infantry gun) may
be equipped with HEAT rounds. Units with these guns
were intended for and used for HE support, but were
equipped with very limited amounts of HEAT ammuni-
tion to defend themselves against enemy tanks.
Using this optional rule, each stand is allowed to make
one direct fire attack per game, in the standard fire phase
against armoured vehicles. This attack has an AP
firepower of 7 and a maximum range of 60 inches.
Unlike normal artillery attacks, this attack does not
automatically suppress and does incur range penalties.
The attacking stand may not have fired previously in the
turn. Recording the expenditure of this ammo by stand
number is required.
26
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
[12.16] Battlefield Air Strikes
Tactical airpower was in its infancy during the mid-
twentieth century. Theories about how it was to be used
and toward what ends changed considerably during
the course of the war. Generally, the majority of tactical
air support missions performed in WWII do not affect
the tactical battles we are simulating to anywhere near
the extent Hollywood or airpower advocates would
have us believe.
Interdiction of supply and reinforcements (isolating the
battlefield) turned out to be the most productive use of
aircraft. Therefore, the appearance of aircraft should be a
rare event on the tabletop. Still, we wanted to provide
those of you who really enjoy the look and flavor of
aircraft over the battlefield with the necessary rules to
add this to your games.
12.16.1 The specifications for various aircraft are
provided in the Weapons Data Tables. Aircraft may have
a firepower value, a bomb load and number of bomb
attacks value, or a rocket load value.
The firepower value is used to perform one strafing
attack while over the battlefield. The appropriate value
for HE or AP must be used based on the unarmoured or
armoured defense of the target.
Air strikes are considered "artillery" attacks. (That is,
results of "no effect" are treated as "suppression" and
attacks at less than minus three (-3) are allowed. Air
strikes take place at the same time as "Indirect artillery
fire" (see rule 5.0 “Sequence of Play.”)
12.16.2 Before the game begins players must designate
the "turn of arrival" of any available aircraft. This is done
secretly in writing. At the beginning of any aircraft's
“turn of arrival,” you must notify your opponent and
designate the target area.
12.16.3 The target area of each air strike must be plotted
before the start of the game before any forces are placed
on the table. The actual attack plotted takes place during
the Artillery Fire Phase of the designated turn of arrival.
For planes that may make a second bombing attack, a
second target area must also be plotted before the start of
the game, and takes place during the Artillery Fire Phase
of the aircraft's third and final turn over the battlefield.
12.16.4 From mid-war on, the Western allies deployed
FASC (Forward Air Support Coordinator) teams with
frontline units. This enabled air strikes to be orchestrat-
ed much more responsively. This option is available only
for U.S. Marines from mid-1943 and for all Western allies
from mid-1944. An FASC team is assigned to a friendly
stand just like an FO (Forward Observer.) These stands
 must have a clear line of sight to the potential target
during the plot phase and may be in any posture. If they
are eliminated at any point during the game, air strikes
that have not yet arrived are cancelled.
Before the scenario begins, the Western ally player rolls
one 1D20 and compares it to his force cohesion level. If
the scenario is a prepared assault and the die-roll is 2 less
than his cohesion level, one FASC team can be assigned
to any stand of the owner's choice. If the scenario is
neither a meeting engagement (no air support allowed)
nor a prepared assault, and the die-roll is 4 less than his
cohesion level, one FASC team can be assigned to any
stand of the owner's choice.
The number of FASC teams allowed is dependent on a
successful modified cohesion roll and scenario type as
follows:
Cohesion
Scenario Type Teams
Modifier
Meeting Not
Not Available
Engagement Available
Attack on -2 die roll
1 FASC
Prepared Position modifier
All Other -4 die roll
1 FASC
Scenarios modifier
Unlike other air support that must be plotted prior to the
start of the scenario, the target area of each "air strike"
coordinated by a FASC team must be plotted during the
Joint Plot Phase three turns in advance of the aircraft's
"turn of arrival."
Once this is complete, the turn of arrival is now known
and the strike proceeds as per 12.16.2 except that aircraft
allowed a second bombing attack must plot this in the
Joint Plot Phase of the turn following the initial attack.
This bombing attack takes place during the Joint
Artillery Fire Phase of the aircraft's third and final turn
over the battlefield.
12.16.5 An aircraft may be subject to enemy AA fire each
turn it attacks. Enemy AA stands within range of the
intended target area and in the firing posture, may
reduce chances of the air strike occurring. Measure range
on the table top from the firing stand to the center of the
ordered target area. Make a cohesion die-roll for each
AA weapon stand to determine if it fires. Each successful
roll increases the aircraft's required cohesion roll for its
attack to occur:
Each firing AA stand of 40mm caliber
+2
or less
Each firing AA stand of greater than
+1
40mm caliber
27
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
If the aircraft's basic cohesion roll is unsuccessful, no
further die-rolls are required. These air strike modifiers
are cumulative for each successful AA stand roll. AA
stands that fire at aircraft may not fire in another phase
of the same turn.
12.16.6 To perform an attack (see 12.16.8 for strafing,
12.16.9 for bombing, or 12.16.10 for rocket attack) an
aircraft must pass a cohesion roll, including any modi-
fiers for AA fire received. If the cohesion roll is success-
ful, a second roll must be performed to prevent deviation
(as in indirect artillery fire). When an air strike deviates,
roll 1D8 for direction and 2D6 for distance. The attack
strikes any stand at this new location, or the nearest stand
(friend or foe) to this new location if it is unoccupied. Let
the dice decide between equidistant targets.
12.16.7 An aircraft may be over the battlefield for a
maximum of three (3) turns. After this, remove it from
play. An aircraft may strafe ground targets once during
any one of the three turns it may be present. An airplane
may only bomb targets during its second or third turns
of activity.
A plane may not conduct strafe and bomb attacks in the
same turn. A plane is only subject to AA fire on turns in
which it is present and attacking a ground target.
An Imperial Japanese Navy “Zero” has commenced a
strafing run on three USMC supply trucks. If the Japanese
player passes the next cohesion roll, the fire will not devi-
ate, and four 1” x 1” impact markers will be placed under
the hapless trucks. As the trucks are loaded with Marines,
any damage inflicted upon the trucks will also be applied
to the infantry squads.
12.16.8 An aircraft's firepower value is used for strafing
attacks. A given aircraft may perform strafing once per
game. Strafing attacks use four contiguous 1" x 1"
markers in a straight line, and attack each location with
using either its HE or AP values depending on whether
the target is armoured or not. This line of impacts must
be plotted in advance just before the aircraft enters the
table. The terrain occupied by the target stand does
modify the firing cohesion roll for strafing attacks. The
CRT die-roll modifiers imposed by the terrain of the
target stand also apply.
 12.16.9 An aircraft's bomb load value is used for
bombing attacks. Some planes carry multiple bombs
and may bomb twice or attack the same location twice
during a single bomb run (see Weapons Data). Bomb
attacks use a single impact marker of the appropriate
size (see Weapons Data) and attacks each location with
either its HE or AP values depending on whether the
target is armoured or not. The location of this impact
must be plotted in advance per 12.16.2 or 12.16.4. The
terrain occupied by the target stand does not modify
the firing cohesion rolls for Bomb attacks. The CRT die-
roll modifiers imposed by the terrain of the target stand
still apply.
12.16.10 An aircraft's rocket load value is used for
rocket attacks. A given aircraft may perform a rocket
attack once per game. Rocket attacks use four contiguous
1" x 1" markers in a straight line, and attack each location
with either its HE or AP values depending on whether
the target is armoured or not. The location of these
impacts must be plotted in advance per 12.16.2 or
12.16.4. A rocket attack is treated as a bomb attack in all
other respects. The terrain occupied by the target stand
does not modify the firing cohesion roll for rocket
attacks. The CRT die-roll modifiers imposed by the
terrain of the target stand still apply.
12.16.11 Artillery impact markers are used to denote
target location for bomb and rocket attacks but these
28
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
markers are removed immediately after the Artillery Fire
Phase and their effect does not persist into the
Movement Phase as artillery does.
12.16.12 Aircraft may carry either bombs or rockets,
never both.
12.16.13 Vehicles use their "top" defense value when
attacked by air strikes if the attacker makes a modified
cohesion roll with a +3 modifier. Otherwise, the attack
is made against the armoured stand's appropriate
defensive arc (see “Facing and Range,” section 7.3).
[12.17] Big Game Hunters
By improvisation and desperation the Soviets learned
that large, low velocity artillery guns could often
disable or destroy German “Big Game” tanks and
assault guns from very close range. The SU-152 and
JSU-152, as well as any country’s 150mm or larger
artillery weapons may conduct a direct fire attack, in
the standard Fire Phase, against armoured fighting
vehicles with their HE firepower instead of their AP
value. The maximum range of this attack is 16 inches. If
the range is 8 inches or less apply a -2 modifier to the
CRT die-roll. The attacking vehicle or stand may not
have fired previously in the turn.
 DESIGNING SCENARIOS
Most wargamers enjoy “balanced” scenarios where both
sides have an equal chance of winning. Unfortunately,
balanced battles rarely occurred during the Second
World War. It’s a simple fact of life that any commander
who attacks the enemy without being reasonably sure of
victory in advance is basically gambling with his men’s
lives, so balanced battles seldom occurred. However,
balanced games are not difficult to create if you are
willing to make the necessary effort. The following
instructions make designing balanced scenarios not only
possible, but also a straightforward and enjoyable
exercise in its own right.
Micro Squad®: The 1:1 Scale Game includes several pre-
generated scenarios to get you started. You may also use
historical Orders of Battle (OOBs), Tables of
Organization and Equipment (TO&Es) or scenarios from
other rules sets as well. However, sooner or later you
will find yourself wishing to design your own scenarios.
This is a great way to make the rules truly fit your taste
and explore the history of the war in a hands-on way.
The following text describes what you’ll have to do and
how to do it to construct balanced battle simulations.
Don’t be put off by the math. The process is actually
quite easy once you get the hang of it.
PREPARATION
In some scenarios one of the players will be required to
roll a 20-sided die.
DEFINITIONS
Friendly Board Edge: The side nearest you as you face
the enemy.
Center Line: A line drawn down the center of the
playing area, between the two “friendly” edges.
Base Points: The number of points a player is given to
purchase forces, unmodified by force cohesion level or
other conditions.
1. SELECT SCENARIO TYPE
All scenarios must include the following information:
Description: Information on the nature of the battle.
Force Ratio: The ratio of Player-A to Player-B “base”
forces.
Force Composition: The ratio of “support unit” points
to “Main Force” points.
Deployment: Where forces are placed and/or when they
arrive on the playing surface.
29
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Game Length: The maximum number of turns.
Objectives: Specific areas on the playing surface you
might have to occupy in order to win.
Victory: How you win this particular scenario!
TYPE A: “MEETING ENGAGEMENT”
Description: Meeting engagements usually occur either
at the beginning of a campaign (the so-called “Battle of
the Frontiers”), or when an attacker is exploiting a
“Breakthrough” and the defender is determined to close
the breach. This kind of action is fluid, confused, and
desperate; a real test of experience and cohesion.
Force Ratio: Player-A and Player-B receive equal “base”
points.
Force Composition: Player-A and Player-B may each
purchase up to 40% of their total point strength in
support units. Off-map artillery and/or air-strikes are not
allowed.
Deployment: Each player’s force enters anywhere along
his “friendly” board edge.
Objective: Any agreed-upon terrain feature such as a
river crossing, village, or high ground located in center
of playing area.
Game Length: 20 Turns.
Victory: Both sides attempt to occupy the objective at
the end of the game.
TYPE B: “RECONNAISSANCE IN FORCE”
Description: Once a new front line has been established
in a series of meeting engagements, there is usually a
short pause while both sides reorganize. This does not
necessarily mean a lull in the action, however. Both sides
will begin active patrolling, both to establish security
and to gauge enemy capabilities and intentions. This
may often escalate into skirmishes and sometimes to
more serious engagements. If one side wants
information badly enough, a major raid may be ordered
to obtain it.
Force Ratio: Player-A (the attacker) and Player-B (the
defender) each receive equal “base” points. Player-B is
allowed to purchase roadblocks and/or light improved
positions for his personnel and weapons stands only.
Force Composition: Player-A may purchase up to 40%
 of his total point strength in support units. Player-B may be used for support units by rolling one (1) D-20, comparing
purchase up to 20% of his total point strength in support it to his force cohesion level (FCL), and consulting the
units. Player-A only may purchase air-strikes. following table.

Deployment: Player-B deploys anywhere on his side of If the die roll is:
the center line. Player-A deploys anywhere on his side of 4+ higher than his FCL: No support units allowed
the center line and at least fifteen (15) inches from it.
1-3 higher than his FCL: up to 15% support units
Objective: A marker placed in the center of a significant Equal to his FCL: up to 30% support units
terrain feature located close to the center of the map 1-3 less than his FCL: up to 45% support units
(agreed upon in advance). 4 or more lower than his FCL: up to 60% support units

Game Length: 20 Turns.
Victory: Player-A: Enter or pass through the “objective”
with one or more of your stands by the end of turn
twelve. Player-B: Prevent a Player-A victory.
Note: Player-B should not reveal die roll to Player-A until after
he has purchased his forces.
Deployment: Player-B deploys to defend the objective,
anywhere on his side of the center line. Player-A deploys
at least fifteen (15) inches in front of the Defender’s most
forward stand.

Objective: A previously agreed-upon terrain feature

(river crossing, village, or high ground two-thirds of the
battlefield length from Player-A’s friendly edge).

Game Length: 20 Turns.

Victory: Player-A/Player-B: Occupy the objective at the

end of the game.

TYPE D: “ASSAULT ON A PREPARED

POSITION”
Description: This is the “grunt’s” nightmare. The bad
guys know you’re coming. They know where you’re
TYPE C: “HASTY ATTACK” coming from. They may even know when you’re coming
Description: There are various reasons for a “hasty” and they’re ready!
attack. One side may hope to throw the enemy off
balance and drive him out of a newly occupied position Force Ratio: Player-A (the attacker) receives three times as
before he can dig in properly. The attacker may have many “base” points as Player-B (the defender). Player-B is
found some weak point and wants to crack it before the allowed to purchase all types of minefields, roadblocks,
enemy can strengthen it. Or, higher headquarters may barbed wire, and all types of improved positions.
hope to surprise the enemy by not making the normal
preparations for a major assault, which often tip the Force Composition: Player-A may purchase up to 75%
defender off to the danger he is in. Whatever the reason, of his total point strength in support units. Player-B
a hasty attack can sometimes be more effective than a determines what percentage of his total point strength
prepared one, and allows the momentum of the may be used for support units by rolling one (1) D20,
offensive to be maintained. comparing it to his force cohesion level (FCL), and
consulting the following table:
Force Ratio: Player-A (the attacker) receives twice as
many “base” points as Player-B (the defender). Player-B is If the die-roll is:
allowed to purchase hasty or standard minefields, 4+ higher than his FCL: up to 15% support units
roadblocks, and light or medium improved positions only. 1-3 higher than his FCL: up to 30% support units
Equal to his FCL: up to 45% support units
Force Composition: Player-A may purchase up to 60% of
his total point strength in support units. Player-B 1-3 less than his FCL: up to 60% support units
determines what percentage of his total point strength may 4 or more lower than his FCL: up to 75% support units

30

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Note: Player-B should not reveal the die-roll to Player-A until
after he has purchased his forces.
Deployment: The defender deploys to defend the
objective. The attacker deploys at least fifteen (15) inches
in front of an imaginary line drawn along the Defender’s
most forward stands.
Objective: A terrain feature such as: a river crossing,
village, or high ground two-thirds of battlefield length
from the attacker’s edge.
Game Length: 30 Turns.
Victory: Player-A/Player-B: Occupy the objective at the
end of the game.
TYPE E: “DELAYING ACTION”
Description: The attacker has broken the line. The
defender has nothing to close the gap with and must
fight for time. The attacker is fighting against time to
maintain his forward momentum. A skillfully executed
delaying action can mean the difference between a
simple defeat and complete disaster.
Force Ratio: Player-A (the attacker) receives three times
as many “base” points as Player-B (the defender). Player-
B is allowed to purchase hasty or standard minefields,
roadblocks, and “light” improved positions only.
Force Composition: Player-A may purchase up to 60%
of his total point strength in support units. Player-B
determines what percentage of his total point strength
may be used for support units by rolling one (1) D20,
comparing it to his force cohesion level (FCL), and
consulting the following table:
If the die-roll is:
4+ higher than his FCL: – No support units allowed
1-3 higher than his FCL: up to 15% support units
Equal to his FCL: up to 30% support units
1-3 less than his FCL: up to 45% support units
4 or more lower than his FCL: up to 60% support units
Note: Player-B should not reveal the die-roll to Player-A until
after he has purchased his forces.
Deployment: Player-B deploys at least 25% of the
battlefield length from the enemy edge. Player-A’s forces
enter anywhere along his “friendly” board edge.
Objective: The defender’s (Player-B’s) board edge.
Game Length: 30 Turns.
31
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Victory: Player-B must prevent Player-A from exiting
10% of his stands off defender’s edge as long as possible.
< 11 Turns - Decisive Attacker (Player-A) Victory
< 16 Turns - Tactical Attacker (Player-A) Victory
< 20 Turns - Minor Attacker (Player-A) Victory
> 10 Turns - Minor Defender (Player-B) Victory
> 15 Turns - Tactical Defender (Player-B) Victory
> 19 Turns - Decisive Defender (Player-B) Victory
2. DETERMINE HISTORICAL CONTEXT
You must now agree on the nationality of the forces
involved and where and when the battle takes place.
Tables of Organization and Equipment (TO&Es) provide
the information you’ll need to do this. Simply pick a
country, a battalion organization for your “Main Force,”
a combat theater, and a time frame.
Each player must now decide what his force cohesion
level will be. TO&Es provide a range of these for the
historical context you have agreed on. Once this is done,
Player-B should determine his Force Composition ratio if
playing the following scenarios: “Hasty Attack,”
“Assault on a Prepared Position,” or “Delaying Action.”
(See “Scenario Type” above.)
3. LAYOUT BATTLEFIELD MAP
The layout of the battlefield should be considered
carefully. Battlefield size should be in proportion to the
size of the action you want to simulate. A rule of thumb
would be to lay out about a foot of frontage for each
defending company to be deployed. A second rule of
thumb is that the map should be long enough to allow
for the deployment of infantry support weapons at their
normal tactical range. Forty-eight inches is a good
working minimum.
Terrain Density determines what percentage of the total
battle area will include some sort of terrain feature. There
are three levels of terrain density: “Open,” “Mixed,” and
“Closed.” Each allows a specific range of terrain density
and a maximum sighting distance as follows:
Open: 2 x 2D6% various terrain features.
Maximum sighting distance = 120”
Mixed: 4 x 2D6% various terrain features.
Maximum sighting distance = 60”
Closed: 7 x 2D6% various terrain features.
Maximum sighting distance = 30”
Terrain features should be made up by the players as
they wish, with the qualification that the area taken up
 by a given piece of terrain should be recorded. (i.e. Example: Player-A bids 50 points, player-B 100 points.
“woods” of 12 sq. inches, a “town” of 4 sq. inches, a Player-A’s point base is now 950 points, Player-B’s is now
section of “river” one inch wide by 12 inches long 900 points.
equaling 12 sq. inches, a single level “hill” of 36 sq.
inches etc.) Players alternate placing terrain features Note: This “auction” to decide who gets to deploy on which
until they reach the agreed upon terrain density. side of the map can be extremely important. The players must
not be allowed to know what the map orientation will be until
Example: A 48” x 36” battlefield with a 25% terrain after the battlefield is laid out.
density would require 432 sq. inches of terrain features.
6. ACQUIRE FORCES.
The Scatter Diagram/Compass Rose should be placed on Purchasing Player-A’s Force: Player-A now gets to
the map by mutual agreement at this time. “buy” forces for the scenario based on his point base. The
point costs for various weapons are listed on the
4. ESTABLISH FORCE POINT VALUES Weapons Data. An additional list below shows the cost of
Based on battlefield size, the players must agree to a items other than weapons:
point base. Players using Micro Armour® 1/285 scale
figures where 1 model or stand = 1 vehicle or squad, and General Headquarters: 1x GHQ is required per player.
where 1” = 25 meters should allocate each defending Additional GHQs may be provided if you wish.
company approximately twelve (12) inches of frontage.
This will prevent units from being outflanked easily or Headquarters/General Headquarters Cost Modifiers:
allow the enemy to break through a line so thin as to be Any stand may be used as a HQ or GHQ. Simply use the
indefensible. In addition, you should keep in mind that normal point cost from the Weapons Data Sheets and
it would be a good idea to provide for some sort of multiply this number by one of the “Cost Modifiers”
reserve, if possible. A good ratio of “line” to “reserve” listed below.
units is 2 / 1. That is, for every two companies in the line,
it is prudent to have one in reserve. GHQ EFFICIENCY COST MODIFIER
-2 GHQ or HQ Point Cost + 20
With all this in mind, the players should calculate how -1 GHQ Point Cost + 30
many points they will need to cover the width of the
board with a reasonable force density. Each player then +0 GHQ Point Cost + 40
secretly records a point base “bid” he thinks he can win +1 GHQ Point Cost + 60
with, based on the above criteria. When these bids are +2 GHQ Point Cost + 80
revealed, the lowest bid will be the one used in the +3 GHQ Point Cost + 100
scenario. Example: The players agree on a point base of
1000 points. A non-HQ stand used as HQ or GHQ:
Point Cost of stand + Cost Modifier (above)
5. DETERMINE MAP ORIENTATION.
Each player must now secretly bid a portion of his point Improved Positions: “Improved Position” markers may
base to decide the orientation of the battlefield. When be purchased at the rate shown below:
these bids are revealed, the highest bidder chooses
which board edge he wants as his “friendly” edge. All Light: 3 points per marker
points used in the bidding are forfeited by both sides, so Medium: 6 points per marker
bid carefully. (In case of ties, roll the dice to decide.) Heavy: 10 points per marker

Mines: “Minefield” markers may be purchased at the

rate shown below:

Hasty: 2 points per one inch “Field”

Standard: 4 points per one inch “Field”
Concentrated: 7 points per one inch “Field”

Barbed Wire: “Barbed Wire” markers may be

purchased at the rate of two (2) points per one square
inch section.

32

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Roadblocks: “Roadblock” markers may be purchased at
the rate of four (4) points per one square inch section.
Off-Map Artillery: Off-map artillery is purchased at the
standard cost but never requires transport. Off-map
artillery may not be purchased in increments smaller
than two-gun sections.
Air Strikes: Air strikes are purchased based on the
Aircraft Data. The point value listed for an aircraft
allows you to use any one of the “Ordnance Values”
listed for that aircraft.
Engineers: Players may convert normal infantry to
engineers by paying ten (10) additional points per stand.
(See “Engineer” rules for information on engineer
abilities.)
Forward Observers: Forward Observers (FOs) are not
separate stands. A stand designated as an FO performs
this function in addition to its other capabilities.
Each player receives one (1) FO for his GHQ.
A player receives one (1) FO for every four (4) artillery
stands capable of indirect fire. (On-Map or Off)
A player may buy the ability to designate additional FO’s
at the rate of sixty (60) points per FO.
Note: The total force fielded may never exceed the total
number of points allocated.
AN EXAMPLE OF SCENARIO DESIGN
To illustrate the scenario design process we’re going to
build an example scenario, going through the process
step-by-step.
1. SELECT SCENARIO TYPE.
The players have chosen a “Hasty Attack”(Type C).
Player-A will be the attacker. Player-B will be the
defender.
2. DETERMINE HISTORICAL CONTEXT.
For our example we have chosen France, 1944. Player-A
has agreed to play the Americans (United States) as the
attacker fielding an Armored Infantry Battalion with a
force cohesion level (FCL) of 16. Player-B will be the
German defender fielding an Infantry Battalion with a
33
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Example: Player-A gets to purchase a force of 950 points.
Purchasing Player-B’s Force
To begin with, divide Player-A’s force cohesion level
(FCL) by Player-B’s FCL and multiply the number
obtained by Player-B’s point base. Next, he should
consult the scenario type to see what the “Force Ratio”
for that scenario is and modify this number accordingly.
Example:
Player-A’s FCL is 15, Player-B’s is 13:
15/13 = 1.153 (round to 1.15).
1.15 x 900 (B’s Point Base) = 1035.
The Scenario is a “Hasty Attack.
B’s Point Base is multiplied by .5. 1035 x .5 = 518
(rounded up).
Player-B gets to purchase a force of 518 points.
7. DETERMINE INITIAL DEPLOYMENT.
In scenarios where one or both players begin on the
battlefield, the defender always places his forces first. In
meeting engagements roll for initiative and the winner
decides which side moves first. The placement of stands,
which are not visible to the attacker due to blocking or
concealing terrain, may be secretly recorded if desired.
This will slow the game and is not recommended for
beginning players or large scenarios.
That’s all there is to building your own scenarios. Once
you’ve done it a few times, it becomes quite easy, and fun!
FCL of 15. The time frame is August 1944. Player-B now
determines his force composition percentage by rolling a
fifteen (15) on a D20, enabling him to purchase up to 30%
of his total point strength in support units
3. LAY OUT THE BATTLEFIELD MAP.
The players agree that the battlefield will be twenty-four
inches wide by forty-eight inches long.
3a. TERRAIN DENSITY AND PLACEMENT
Since our battle is taking place in Southern France, we’re
going to make the terrain “mixed.” Player-A agrees to
roll the dice and obtains a seven. This means that 28% of
the battlefield will be covered by some type of terrain (a
total of 322 square inches).
 Player-A picks an area of “woods” 6” x 12” (a total of 72 3rd Platoon
square inches) and places it where he likes. (72”) 3x Inf/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 84
1x 60mm Mortar(1)/M3 Hftrack/.50cal @20+15 35
Player-B picks a “town” that is 6” x 8” (48 square inches) 1x MMG/M3 Halftrack/.50cal @14+15 29
and places this where he likes. (120”)
ATG Platoon (-)
Player-A places a “ridge” (12” x 6”) and places that on 2x 57mm ATG/M3 Halftrack/.50cal @22+15 74
the map. (192”)
Company B (-)
Player-B picks out a “river” that is 1” wide x 24” long
Company HQ
(24 square inches) and runs it from one board edge to
1x Infantry HQ/M3 Hftrack/.50cal @32+15 47
another, placing it wherever he likes. (216”)
1st Platoon (-)
Player-A picks another area of “woods” 7” x 8” (a total 3x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 84
of 56 square inches) and places it where he likes. (272”) 1x 60mm Mortar(1)/M3 Hftrack/.50cal @20+15 35
Player-B finishes the map off by adding one more ridge 2nd Platoon (-)
(5” x 10”) right where he wants it. (322”) 2x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 56
1x 60mm Mortar(1)/M3 Hftrack/.50cal @20+15 35
The battlefield is ready to go!
1x MMG/M3 Halftrack/.50cal @14+15 29
4. ESTABLISH FORCE POINT VALUES. 3rd Platoon (-)
Given a battlefield width of 24 inches, the theater, and 2x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 56
the timeframe involved, the players agree to a point base 1x MMG/ M3 Halftrack/.50cal @14+15 29
of 2500.
Company C (-)
5. DETERMINE MAP ORIENTATION. Company HQ
Now we auction off “map orientation.” Player-A bids 40 1x Inf HQ/M3 Halftrack/.50cal @32+15 47
points. Player-B bids 50. As winner of the auction,
1st Platoon (-)
Player-B gets to decide which side of the map will be his
3x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 84
“friendly” side. Player-A forfeits 40 points, reducing his
1x 60mm Mortar(1)/M3 Hftrack/.50call @20+15 35
base to 2460. Player-B forfeits 50 points. The players
agree to make the town on Player “B’s” side of the board 2nd Platoon (-)
as the scenario objective. The Americans must have at 2x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 56
least one armed stand in the town by the end of turn 20. 1x MMG/ M3 Halftrack/.50cal @20+15 29

6. ACQUIRE FORCES. 3rd Platoon

3x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 84
Player-A (The US attacker) has 2460 points to spend and
1x 60mm Mortar(1)/M3 Hftrack/.50call @20+15 35
“buys” the following:
1x MMG/ M3 Halftrack/.50cal @14+15 29
Organization Point Cost Sub ATG Platoon (+)
total 4x 57mm ATG/M3 Hftrack/.50cal @22+15 148
1x Battalion HQ
1x GHQ+1/M3 Halftrack/.50cal @72+15 Armored Inf MG Platoon
1x Inf/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 115 2x MMG/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 56

Armored Mortar Platoon

Company A (-)
3x M4 MMC (1) @46 138
Company HQ
1x Inf HQ/M3 Halftrack/.50cal @32+15 47
Player-A Battalion Points Total: 1615
1st Platoon (-)
3x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 84 Player-A may purchase up to 60 percent of his total point
1x 60mm Mortar(1)/M3 Hftrack/.50cal @17+15 32 strength in support units. 1615/2460 = .66. Therefore,
Player-A has purchased enough “Main Force” points to
2nd Platoon (-)
meet the scenario requirements. Player-A now has 2460-
2x Infantry/M3 Halftrack/.30cal @14+14 56
1615 = 845 points to purchase support units to spend and
1x MMG/M3 Halftrack/.50cal @14+15 29
buys the following:

34

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Medium Tank Platoon (-) 1st Platoon
4x M4 Sherman @70 280 3x Infantry ’44 @13 39

Medium Tank Platoon (-) 2nd Platoon (-)

4x M4 Sherman @70 280 3x Infantry ’44 @13 39

Anti-Aircraft Battery (-) 3rd Platoon

3x M16 MGMC @42 126 3x Infantry ’44 @13 39
Armored Engineer Platoon Support Platoon (-)
4x Engineer Inf/ M3 Hftrack/.30cal @24+14 152 1x MMG @14 14
1x 81mm Stummel (2) @28 25
Player-A Support Points Total: 838
3rd Company
Player-A Points Total 2453
Company HQ
(7 points were not used)
1x Infantry HQ @30 30
Before we can purchase Player-B’s troops we have to 1st Platoon
balance his forces against those of Player-A as follows: 3x Infantry ’44 @13 39
1. Player-B multiplies his point base (2500) by Player-A’s 2nd Platoon
FCL (16). The result is 40,000. 3x Infantry ’44 @13 39
2. He divides this number by his FCL (15). The result 3rd Platoon
is 2667. 3x Infantry ’44 @13 39
3. The scenario is a “Hasty Attack”, so Player-B gets to
spend half as many points as Player-A. Support Company (-)
3x MMG @14 42
4. Halve this number and subtract from it the points bid 3x 120mm Mortar (1) @84 252
determining map orientation (50 points).
5. The final result is 1283, the number of points Player-B Battalion Fortifications
can spend on his choice of troops. 20x Lt Improved Positions @3 60

Player-B (The German defender) has 1283 points to Player-B Battalion Points Total: 910
spend and “buys” the following:
Player-B may purchase up to 30 percent of his total point
Organization Point Cost Subtotal strength in support units. 910/1283 = .71. Therefore,
1x Battalion HQ - Player-B has purchased enough battalion unit points to
1x GHQ+0 @50 50 meet the scenario requirements. Player-B now has 1283-
910 = 373 points to purchase support units to spend and
1st Company (-) “buys” the following:
Company HQ
1x Infantry HQ @30 30 Panzerjaeger Platoon (-)
3x StugIIIF @61 183
1st Platoon
3x Infantry ’44 @13 39 Anti-Tank Platoon (-)
3x 75mm Pak40/Med Imp Position @38+6 132
2nd Platoon (-)
3x Infantry ’44 @13 39 Light Flak Platoon (-)
2x 20mm Quad/Med Imp Position @21+6 54
3rd Platoon (-)
2x Infantry ’44 @13 26 Player-B Support Points Total: 369
Support Platoon (-) Player-B Points Total: 1279
1x MMG @14 14 (4 points were not used.)
1x 81mm Stummel (2) @28 25
The example above would be a large scenario indeed! It
2nd Company (-) was put together as an example of how you can build an
Company HQ effective force by combining battalion level units with
1x Infantry HQ @30 30 support units. Note that some of the components are

35

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 under strength. Historically, units were seldom at author-
ized strengths, having sustained losses that have not been
made good or having units detached for other duties.
OPTIONAL UNIT DETERMINATION
If you wish to use Optional Rule 12.1 “Unit
Determination” you must add an additional step to
those above. Before buying Player-A’s forces:
1. Multiply Player-B’s total by his Determination Factor
(DF) expressed as a decimal.
2. Multiply this number by his cohesion level. (Next,
reverse the process.)
3. Divide by Player-A’s Cohesion level.
4. Divide by Player-A’s DF expressed as a decimal.
5. Apply whatever modifier the scenario requires.
(The result is the total points Player-A may spend on
his forces.)
Example: Let’s assume that Player-A’s DF = 30% and
Player-B's DF = 35%. First, Player-B buys his forces. Then
Player-A does the calculations below:
1279 (Player B’s Total) x .35 (Player-B’s DF) = 448
448 x 15 (Player-B’s Cohesion) = 6720
6720 / 16 (Player-A’s Cohesion) = 420
420 / .3 (Player-A’s BDF) = 1400
1400 x 2 (Hasty Attack) = 2800
As you see, the difference in the two sides’ “determina-
tion factors” can make a big difference in the number of
36
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
points received. In this case, Player-A gets an additional
340 points. Remember, this is due, in part, to the fact that
Player-B must sustain approximately 35% casualties
before breaking. Player-A’s force will generally break
after suffering only 30% casualties. Hence, Player-A
needs more troops for the scenario to be balanced.
Note: As a further balancing tool, you may “tweak” the deter-
mination factor of any force, up or down, by as much as five
percent (5%). This allows you to modify the point totals used to
purchase troops by factoring in the ability to sustain casualties.
7. DETERMINE INITIAL DEPLOYMENT.
Player-B deploys to defend the town. (Remember, he
cannot place any stands on Player-A’s half of the board.)
His advantages are the terrain (town) and his allotment
of improved positions. He should take every advantage
of terrain. The Americans must occupy the town to win,
so he would be well served to set up a series of crossfires
to blunt the main American spearhead. His mortars,
panzerjaegers, and anti-tank guns should be used to
slow down and channel the American advance, forcing
him away from the objective if possible. Player-A plans
to advance with his armor in a sweep around one flank
to draw German artillery and tank fire away from the
town. Once this is set in motion, he plans to advance his
infantry under cover of a smoke screen, provided by his
mortars. Using this cover he intends to assault and
occupy the town before the German player can stop him.
He also has a platoon of combat engineers, which will
come in handy for any close-assaults. Coordination
won’t be easy, but he has a superior GHQ, which will
give him good flexibility. He could very well pull this off.
Each side has an even chance to win.
 DESIGNER’S NOTES
My first foray into miniature gaming was playing a
game of “A Century of Conflict,” a set of rules written by
John Fernandes. John and I met back in 1993 when both
of us were living in Seattle. At the time, I was a dedicated
board game collector, player, and would-be designer.
After I showed John the counter and map graphics I had
been working on for my game design, he mentioned that
he had written a set of miniature rules and would like to
see if we could convert it into board game format. John’s
game was then titled “Brazen Chariots” and depicted
tactical armored combat in North Africa from 1940-42.
What attracted me to John’s rules was the way they
reinforced concepts about combined arms warfare and
the psychology of men under fire that I had been
studying for the past 35 years. In addition, John’s
cohesion rules forced players to deal with the effect of
entropy on the modern battlefield and how to manage
chaos when events don’t go as you planned. I believe the
word “elegant” comes to mind.
A few years after moving down to Texas, John called to
tell me that the GHQ folks wanted to publish his set of
rules, then titled “A Century of Conflict.” Thus began
John’s and my own association with GHQ. “A Century of
Conflict” was retitled Micro Amour®: The Game - WWII
(MATG – WWII) by GHQ in 2001. This was followed by
Micro Amour®: The Game - Modern in 2004. At
Historicon in 2005 Gregg Scott and Jim Moffet of GHQ
tasked us with another project: adapting John’s platoon
level rules down to the next tactical level. It seems that
many of the Micro Armour® players out there didn’t
favor stands representing platoons of tanks or infantry
or sections or batteries of guns. They preferred an even
more tactical approach of individual vehicle and squad
level combat.
After accepting the challenge, the first thought that
came to me was “If it isn’t broke, don’t fix it.” John’s
basic concepts of cohesion, movement group orders,
and indirect artillery fire plotting worked pretty
damned well for the platoon rules so these remained
pretty much intact.
The first task was to establish a new ground and time
scale. For selfish reasons, I wanted to keep the same
mounting base size used in MATG – WWII. Allowing a
squad a frontage of 25 yards to the inch seemed about
right. This is in line with frontages for the platoon game
and will allow players to play either the platoon or
squad level rules without having to rebase their models.
The only modifications players would have to make
would be to create separate machine gun and light
37
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
mortar stands which in the platoon level game are
known as infantry support stands.
Establishing a time scale of 1 minute per turn allowed
me to simply multiply the movement rates of the platoon
rules by 4/3. This keeps the relative movement of stands
close to that of the platoon game. Using a different ratio
of ground scale to time scale would either result in
stands scurrying halfway across the board in one or two
turns or, leave them crawling along the map at one or
two inches per turn. I believe I reached a nice
compromise with most infantry stands having a
movement rate of four inches per turn (six inches using
the “Double-Time” rule).
Separating the infantry support stands into separate
machine gun and light mortar squads also allowed me to
create the “Machine Gun Area Fire” rule. This rule
allows players to employ their machine gun stands (rep-
resenting two heavy or medium machine guns) to
perform fire against individual targets or lay down a
“beaten zone,” denying enemy infantry wide swaths of
open ground. This is where those company and battalion
level mortars come in handy, laying down smoke screens
for advancing infantry.
The artillery rules from the platoon rules have stayed
intact with some notable exceptions. First, artillery
impact marker sizes are now differentiated depending
upon the caliber of the artillery firing. This was
something that was not practical for the platoon rules
since the scale for those rules is 100 yards per inch.
Second, the “Artillery Efficiency” optional rules in the
platoon game are not optional for Micro Squad®: The 1:1
Scale Game. This forces players fielding forces other
than U.S., British, or German to plot all of their entire
artillery before the scenario begins. This reflects the
limitations of most nations’ artillery doctrines during the
war. Until 1944, the U.S. Army and Marine Corps were
the only land forces in the world whose artillery doctrine
allowed them to adjust indirect fire in a matter of a few
minutes. Third, limbering and unlimbering anti-tank
and field guns becomes more time consuming
depending on the transport cost of the gun involved.
This could become the basis for a “covering” scenario in
which friendly field artillery attempts to escape from
well armed and mobile enemy forces overrunning their
positions. Light covering forces should be used to screen
their retreat from the board.
As for weapons ranges, most players will be within
effective range of each other’s heavy ordnance within the
first one or two turns. This will encourage players to
 both place plenty of hard cover on the table and use
those company and battalion level mortars to lay down
smoke. Night, dusk, and dawn scenarios are also
effective ways of reducing spotting ranges. Dusk and
dawn scenarios can be structured so that spotting ranges
gradually decrease or increase during the scenario.
Night scenario spotting ranges can vary due to cloud
cover and/or phase of the moon. North African scenarios
can involve limited spotting distances due to
sandstorms, with spotting distances increasing and/or
decreasing during the scenario. There really is no hard or
fast rule for limiting spotting ranges. Players are
encouraged to use some common sense, experiment, and
come to their own conclusions.
Another deviation from the platoon rules was the
separate armor values (front, side, rear, and top) for each
armored fighting vehicle in the game. You will notice
that many vehicles have unarmoured target values for
their side, rear, or top armor values. I feel this is the most
realistic method of depicting the tactical limitations of
open sided and/or open topped individual tank
destroyers, self-propelled guns, halftracks, etc.
Firepower values of infantry stands were based on
establishment strengths. That is the reason Bersaglieri
infantry stands have an HE firepower value of (7).
Bersaglieri infantry squads had an established strength of
17 men and were allotted two light machine guns. If you
think this is a bit optimistic, try reducing the number of
light machine guns to 1 and/or reducing the number of
men armed with bolt action rifles from 11 down to 8 or 9.
Use the formulas given below to adjust the firepower and
point values of the stand(s).
Something else players may want to experiment with
are infantry stands anti-tank firepower. If you wish to
limit the number of anti-tank “shots” a particular
infantry stand can attempt during a particular scenario,
you will have to use a copy of the roster sheet provided
in the markers and templates to keep track of a
particular stand’s remaining turns of anti-tank fire, and
adjust the stand’s point value. Adjusting the point cost of
such a stand should be done by prorating the stand’s
armor piercing firepower component of the point cost
formula by the percentage of turns of anti-tank fire that
stand may attempt.
The orders of battles (OOBs) provided in the rules are by
no means comprehensive. At best they serve as a
snapshot of typical formations at a particular period of
the war. For example: the Wehrmacht routinely
employed captured enemy equipment to substitute for
losses that domestic production could not keep up with.
Whole companies of captured Soviet T-34s and French
38
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Somua tanks were used on the Russian front. Renaults,
Somuas, and converted Lorraine carriers were
extensively used in France in 1944. For the Soviets, Lend
Lease Churchills, Valentines, and Matilda IIs would
equip entire tank battalions. The OOB lists are based on
two criteria:
1. What could typically be found in combat
formations during the period in question.
2. The earliest point in the war at which a weapon
could be expected to be available in large numbers.
Just because a weapon (like the SdKfz.222) isn’t listed for
1944 doesn’t mean there weren’t any in service. It’s just
that this particular weapon is not representative of what
was typically available in the period. Any weapon, once
deployed, can be used any time afterward. No one should
take the contents of the OOB charts as holy writ coming
from the desk of God Almighty, but merely as guidelines.
For more detailed and varied orders of battle I can
recommend three outstanding sources of information:
Gary Kennedy’s “Bayonet Strength” website, where
WWII battalion level organizations are listed in great
detail. This is a great site! Another outstanding source is
Dr. Leo Niehorster’s “World War II Armed Forces”
website. You can get lost for days in Dr. Niehorster’s
orders of battle listings for dozens of countries. Finally,
there are Osprey’s “Battle Order“ series of books.
Although not free like the two websites listed above, they
are, in my opinion, worth every penny spent on them.
The point value of combat stands were calculated using
the following formula:
Point Cost =
2[(AP)(APR)/40 + (HE)(HER)/40 + MV + DV]
Where:
AP = Armor Piercing Firepower
APR = Armor Piercing Range
HE = High Explosive Firepower
HER = High Explosive Range
MV = Movement Value (multiplied by .50 if
tracked, by .30 if wheeled, and by 0 if foot)
DV = Defense Value (average armor value for
armored vehicles, multiplied by half for soft
and personnel targets)
Point values were then modified for certain weapon
characteristics:
 If the stand must Where:
obey facing restrictions: multiply by .80 SAFT = Small Arms Firepower Total

If the stand can The small arms totals were calculated by assigning and
perform indirect fire: multiply by 1.10 totaling the following values to each weapon present in
If the stand has the squad/stand:
movement rate of 3 or less: multiply by .90
3-Man MG Team: 100
If the stand has 2-Man MG Team: 90 (squad automatic weapon)
movement rate of 0: multiply by .80
Submachine Gun: 60 (BAR included)
For mortar stands with multiple tubes, multiply the Assault Rifle: 40
firepower values by the number of tubes in the stand. Semi-automatic Rifle: 25
Rocket artillery and certain vehicles (for example, the
Bolt Action Rifle: 20
Churchill AVRE) firepower values are multiplied by .25
since they may fire only once per four turns. Pistol: 15

The point value of transport stands were calculated The following individuals were indispensable in getting
using the following formula: Micro Squad®: The 1:1 Scale Game - WWII off the
ground: John “Obi-Juan” Fernandes (The Rules Master),
Point Cost = without whom all of this would have never happened.
[(AP)(APR)/40 + (HE)(HER)/40] + .25(CC + MV + DV) Thanks to all of my playtesters who helped me break the
rules and fix them repeatedly: Don Coon, Kirk Reed,
Where: David Sagiraslvili, Ed McGinley, John Lloyd, Andy
AP = Armor Piercing Firepower Rogers, and Herb Flathers. I would also like to thank
APR = Armor Piercing Range Nicole Martinez and Channing Scott whose patience,
HE = High Explosive Firepower understanding, and perseverance were key to getting
these rules to print. Special thanks to the founder and
HER = High Explosive Range owner of GHQ, Gregory Dean Scott, whose contribution
MV = Movement Value (multiplied by .20 if to the wargaming hobby remains underappreciated in
tracked, by .15 if wheeled, and by .10 if foot) my humble opinion. Special thanks also goes to Jim
Moffet, who coordinated the efforts of the “Mad Dogs”
CC = Cargo Capacity
and has always been there whenever I needed help.
DV = Defense Value (average armor value for
armored vehicles, multiplied by half for soft And of course an enormous thank you to the love of my
and personnel targets.) life, Cameron, whose encouragement throughout the
writing and development of these rules has been
Average armor values were calculated using the invaluable.
following formula:
A special “thank you” for assistance in preparing this
Armor Value = [F +2S + R +T]/5
revised edition goes to Leif Edmondson (Red Leif), one
Where: of the original “Mad Dogs” whose assistance during the
F = Front Armor Value past year has been invaluable.
S = Side Armor Value
These rules are dedicated to the memory of John
R = Rear Armor Value Fernandes, a man who has made my life richer. John
T = Top Armor Value was a man of many talents: musician, historian, soldier,
philosopher, gourmet cook, writer, and game designer.
Non-armored target sides were assigned a soft target He was fiercely loyal to his friends, family, and country.
value and multiplied by .50 Although John did not live long enough to see the
publication of these rules, his memory will live on in his
The high explosive firepower of infantry, cavalry, and work and in the hearts of his family and friends. I will
infantry MMG stands were calculated using the miss him greatly.
following formula:
George Chrestensen
Firepower Value = SAFT/50

39

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 A BRIEF BIBLIOGRAPHY
This is a short list of materials that were invaluable to me while designing Micro Squad®: The 1:1 Scale Game - WWII.
It does not include numerous websites, which were extremely useful for both weapons data and tables of
organization.

45th Infantry Division Historical Board. The Fighting Forty-Fifth: The Combat Report of an Infantry Division. Oklahoma
City, 1989

Allen, Louis. Burma: The Longest War 1941-45. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1985

Angelucci, Enzo and Paolo Matricardi. World War II Airplanes Vol. 1. Chicago: Rand McNally, 1978

---. World War II Airplanes Vol. 2. Chicago: Rand McNally, 1978

Baker, A.D., III. Allied Landing Craft of World War Two. Annapolis: Naval Institute Press, 1944

Barker, A.J. The March on Delhi. London: Faber & Faber, 1963

Batchelor, John and Ian Hogg. Artillery. New York: Scribner and Sons, 1972

Batchelor, John and Kenneth John Macksey. Tank: a History of the Armored Fighting Vehicle. New York: Ballantine, 1973

Battistelli, Pier Paolo. Desert Rats: British 8th Army in North Africa 1941-43. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2007

---. Panzer Divisions: 1944-45. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2009

---. Panzer Divisions: The Blitzkrieg Years 1939-40. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2007

---. Panzer Divisions: The Eastern Front 1941-43. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2008

---. Rommel's Afrika Korps: Tobruk to El Alamein. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2006

Blumenson, Martin. Breakout and Pursuit. Washington: Center of Military History, United States Army, 1989

Burtt, John D. "Red Sun/Red Star: The Nomonhan Campaign in Manchuria." Strategy & Tactics No. 158, 1993. Print

Chamberlain, Peter and Terry Gander. Anti-Tank Weapons. New York: Arco Pub. Co., 1974

Chamberlain, Peter and Chris Ellis. British and American Tanks of WWII. New York: Arco Pub. Co., 1969

---. Tanks of the World 1915-1945. London: Cassell and Co., 2002

Chant, Christopher. Aircraft of World War II. New York: Barnes & Noble, 1999

---. World Encyclopedia of the Tank. London: Stephens Limited, 1994

Coox, Alvin. Nomonhan: Japan Against Russia, 1939. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1985

Cross, Robin. The Battle of Kursk: Operation Citadel 1943. New York: Barnes & Noble, 1994

Davies, W.J.K. Panzer Regiments. London: Almark, 1978

D'Este, Carlo. Decision in Normandy. Harper Perennial, 1995

Drea, Edward J. Nomonhan: Japanese-Soviet Tactical Combat, 1939. Fort Leavenworth, Kan.: Combat Studies Institute,
U.S. Army Command and General Staff College, 1981

40

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Ellis, Chris and Denis Bishop. Military Transport of World War II. New York: Macmillan, 1971

Featherston, Alwyn. Battle for Mortain. Novato, Calif.: Presidio Press, 1993

Foss, Christopher. Illustrated Encyclopedia of the World's Tanks and Fighting Vehicles. London: Salamander Books, 1977

Frank, Richard. Guadalcanal. New York: Penguin Books, 1990

Gabel, Christopher R. Seek, Strike, and Destroy: U.S. Army Tank Destroyer Doctrine in World War II. Fort Leavenworth,
Kan.: Combat Studies Institute, U.S. Army Command and General Staff College, 1985

Garland, Albert & Howard Smyth. Sicily and the Surrender of Italy. Washington: Center of Military History, United
States Army, 1965

Glantz, David & Jonathan House. The Battle of Kursk. Lawrence, Kan.: University of Kansas Press, 1999

Hammel, Eric. Guadalcanal: Starvation Island. New York: Crown Publishers, 1987

Heckmann, Wolf. Rommel's War in North Africa. New York: Smithmark Pub., 1995

Hickey, Des & Gus Smith. Operation Avalanche: The Salerno Landings. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1969

Hogg, Ian. British and American Artillery of World War Two. London: Greenhill Books, 2002

---. German Artillery of World War Two. London: Greenhill Books, 2002

---. Mortars. Ramsbury: Crowood, 2001

Horne, Alistair. To Lose a Battle: France 1940. New York: Penguin Books, 1990

Hoyt, Edwin. Guadalcanal. New York: Stein and Day, 1982

Hunnicut, R.P. Halftrack: a History of American Semi-Tracked Vehicles. Novato, Calif.: Presidio Press, 2001

---. Pershing: a History of the Medium Tank T20 Series. Berkeley, Calif.: Feist Publications, 1971

---. Sherman: a History of the American Medium Tank. San Rafael, Calif.: Taurus Enterprises, 1978

---. Armored Car: a History of American Wheeled Combat Vehicles. Novato, Calif.: Presidio Press, 2002

Jackson, W.G.F. The Battle for North Africa. New York: Mason/Charter, 1975

Jentz, Thomas. Tank Combat in North Africa: The Opening Rounds. Atglen, Penn.: Schiffer Pub., 1998

Latimer, Jon. Tobruk 1941: Rommel's Opening Move. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2001

Mesko, Jim. Amtracs in Action. Carrollton, Tex.: Squadron/Signal Publications, 1993

Milsom, John. Russian Tanks 1900-1970. New York: Galahad, 1970

Molinari, Andrea. Desert Raiders: Axis and Allied Special Forces 1940-43. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2007

Morris, Eric. Salerno: A Military Fiasco. New York: Stein and Day, 1983

Munson, Kenneth. Bombers: Patrol and Transport Aircraft, 1939-45. New York: Macmillan, 1969

---. Fighters: Attack and Training Aircraft, 1939-45. New York: Macmillan, 1969

Nafziger, George F. Italian Order of Battle World War II Vol. 1. Nafziger Collection Inc., 1996

41

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 ---. Italian Order of Battle World War II Vol. 2. Nafziger Collection Inc., 1996

---. Italian Order of Battle World War II Vol. 3. Nafziger Collection Inc., 1996

Nelson, Guy. Thunderbird, a History of the 45th Infantry Division. 45th Infantry Division Association, 1969

Norris, John. Infantry Mortars of World War II. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2002

Quarrie, Bruce. German Airborne Divisions Blitzkrieg 1940-41. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2004

---. German Airborne Divisions Mediterranean Theatre 1942-45. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2005

Reardon, Mark J. Victory at Mortain: Stopping Hitler's Panzer Counteroffensive. Lawrence, Kan.: University Press of
Kansas, 2002

Reynolds, Michael. Steel Inferno. New York: Sarpedon, 1997

Rottman, Gordon L. Japanese Army in World War II: Conquest of the Pacific 1941-42. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2005

---. Japanese Army in World War II: The South Pacific and New Guinea 1942-43. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2005

---. U.S. Marine Corps Pacific Theatre of Operations 1941-43. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2004

---. U.S. Marine Corps Pacific Theatre of Operations 1943-44. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2004

Rutherford, Bill. The Gamers' Guide to WW II Small Unit Organizations and TO&Es. Coopersville: Battle Honors, 1995

Senger und Etterlin, F.M. von. German Tanks of WWII. New York: Galahad, 1969

Shaw, Ian. WWII Army Organisations and Equipment. 3rd ed. UK: Tabletop Games, 1986

Slim, William, Field-Marshal Vicount. Defeat Into Victory. New York: McKay, 1961

Smith, Michael. Bloody Ridge: The Battle that Saved Guadalcanal. Novato, Calif.: Presidio Press, 2000

U.S. War Department. Handbook on German Military Forces. Baton Rouge, La.: Louisiana State Press, 1990

U.S. War Department. Handbook on Japanese Military Forces. London: Greenhill Books, 1991

White, B.T. Tanks and Other AFVs of the Blitzkrieg Era. London: Blanford, 1972

Zaloga, Steven. Japanese Tanks 1939-45. Oxford: Osprey

Publishing, 2007

---. U.S. Anti-Tank Artillery 1941-45. Oxford: Osprey

Publishing, 2005

---. U.S. Armored Units in the North Africa and Italian

Campaigns 1942-43. Oxford: Osprey, 2006

---. U.S. Tank and Tank Destroyer Battalions in the ETO 1944-45.
Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2005

42

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS DATA SHEETS
In the following pages you will be presented with a wide
variety of weapons, vehicles, and personnel. For clarity's
sake, the various data pertaining to these unit stands have
been put into chart form. Each of the columns of the chart
details a different aspect of a specific stands performance
in the game.
WEAPON TYPE - The nomenclature, name, or designa-
tion of the stand. If the weapon has a limited frontal fir-
ing arc, there will be a "^" next to its name. If the
weapon has a limited rear firing arc, there will be a "^^"
next to its name. Light and medium mortar stands may
have a number in brackets [1], [3], etc. This is the num-
ber of tubes the stands represents. An artillery stand
with an "S" next to its name may fire smoke missions. A
stand with a ">" next to its name may lay down a
"Beaten Zone" (see rules section 7.5). A stand with a “!”
next to its name is a rocket weapon and may fire once
every four turns.
POINT VALUE - A comparative value or "price" for the
stand to be used as a means of "balancing" scenarios.
FIREPOWER - There are two firepower values possible
for a stand: "Armor Piercing" firepower (AP), and "High
Explosive" or "Small Arms" firepower (HE). The "AP" fire-
power is used when firing at armored vehicle stands. The
"HE" firepower is used for all other attacks. An "F" in the
firepower column indicates a "flame throwing" weapon
(see rules section 11.6). A "#" next to a firepower value
indicates that the stand may employ indirect fire (see
rules section 7.8).
RANGE - This is the maximum range (in inches) at which
the weapon may be used.
QUICK WEAPONS DATA SYMBOL KEY
^ = Limited frontal firing arc
^^ = Limited rear firing arc
S = May fire smoke missions
> = May lay down a “Beaten Zone”
43
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
MINIMUM RANGE - Most artillery stands have a mini-
mum range (in inches). They may not fire at a target at
less than this distance (see rules section 7.6.9).
DEFENSE - This number represents the basic "defense
value" of the stand. If the defense value of the stand is in
brackets "[ ]", the stand is an armored vehicle. “[F, S, R, T]”
refers to the armoured value of the front, side, rear, and
top of the vehicle. If the defense value of the stand is
marked with two asterisks (**), the defense value of that
stand is halved if it is fired on when it is the movement
posture or fire/move posture (round down any fractions).
An unmarked defense value refers to unarmoured vehi-
cles, weapons, or equipment.
SPEED - The maximum number of movement points the
stand may expend in one Movement Phase. There are
three movement classes: Wheeled (W), Tracked (T), and
Foot (F). Some stands are capable of "swimming" and are
have a separate amphibious movement rate designated
with an "A."
CARGO CAP. - If a stand is capable of "transporting"
other stands there will be a number in this column repre-
senting the maximum capacity of the stand to do this.
TRANS. REQ. - If a stand is capable of being transported
by another stand, this is the amount of "cargo capacity"
(see above) required to do this.
YEAR - This represents the time span in which the
weapon was in widespread service.
! = Rocket weapon: may fire once
every four turns
# = May employ indirect fire
** = Defense value halved if fired
on while in movement posture
or fire/move posture
 Weapons Data: FINLAND
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

Finnish Tanks
FT-17 MG 10 0 5 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 3T - - 39-40
FT-17 11 2 3 32 20 - [1/1/1/1] 3T - - 39-40
Vickers Mark E (A) 32 4 4 40 40 - [3/2/1/1] 12T - - 39-40
T-37A 23 1 3 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 17T/3A - - 41-42
OT-130 15 9f 9f 2 2 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 41-44
T-26 Model 1933 21 3 3 32 20 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 41-42
T-26 Model 1937 24 4 3 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 41-44
T-34 B-F 68 8 5 64 64 - [8/6/5/2] 16T - - 42-44
KV-1C 67 8 5 64 64 - [10/6/6/3] 13T - - 42-44
PzIV FJ 77 9 5 80 80 - [7/4/4/1] 13T - - 1944
Finnish Anti-Tank Weapons
25mm ATG ^ 9 3 2 28 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 39-42
37mm PaK 35 ^ 9 3 2 32 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 39-42
45mm ATG Model 1932 ^ 12 4 2 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 40-44
50mm PaK 38 ^ 19 6 4 48 48 - 5 0 - 6 42-44
75mm PaK 97 ^ 20 6 5 48 48 - 5 0 - 6 43-44
75mm PaK 40 ^ 38 9 5 80 80 - 4 0 - 8 1944
STuG IIIG ^ 61 9 5 80 80 - [7/3/3/2] 13T - - 43-44
Finnish Infantry Close Support Vehicles
BT-42 ^ 102 2 8 210 # 210 # - [1/1/1/1] 9T - - 42-44
T-28 61 1 5 136 136 - [5/4/4/2] 13T - - 41-44
Finnish Armoured Cars
BA-20 20 0 5 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 21W - - 41-42
BA-10 26 4 3 40 20 - [1/1/1/1] 21W - - 41-44
Finnish Anti-Aircraft Weapons
AAMG > 10 1 4 40 40 - 4 0 - 4 39-44
40mm AAG > 19 4 6 40 40 - 4 0 - 6 39-44
80m AAG 15 2 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 8 39-44
Landswerk 36 4 6 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 14T - - 41-44
Finnish Artillery
50mm Mortar (2) ^ 12 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F - 6 39-44
81mm Mortar (1) ^, S 33 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 4 39-44
81mm Mortar (2) ^, S 61 0 6 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 8 39-44
120mm Mortar (1) ^, S 93 2 9 230 230 24 5 0 - 8 39-44
76mm Gun 44 1 5 216 216 2 4 0 - 6 39-44
105mm Gun ^, S 152 3 8 384 384 4 2 0 - 10 39-44
105mm Howitzer ^, S 129 3 8 330 330 3 2 0 - 10 41-44
4.5” Howitzer (110mm) ^ 75 2 8 210 210 4 2 0 - 10 39-44
150mm Howitzer ^, S 179 3 9 420 420 3 2 0 - 10 41-44
122mm Howitzer ^, S 145 3 8 370 370 4 3 0 - 10 39-44
152mm Howitzer ^, S 185 4 9# 400 400 4 3 0 - 12 39-44

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

44

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
Finnish Transport Vehicles
Cart 3 - - - - - 2 8F 6 - 39-44
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 39-44
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 39-44
Pack Horses 5 - - - - - 2 5F 8 - 39-44
Light Truck 7 - - - - - 1 27W 6 - 39-44
Medium Truck 9 - - - - - 1 24W 10 - 39-44
Heavy Truck 10 - - - - - 1 21W 14 - 39-44
Light Tractor 10 - - - - - 1 21T 8 - 39-44
Medium Tractor 11 - - - - - 1 20T 12 - 39-44
Finnish Personnel
Infantry ‘39 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-42
Infantry ‘41 11 1 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 42-43
Infantry ‘44 12 4 5 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 1944
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 39-44
Infantry HQ 9 9 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-45
Cavalry 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-44
Cavalry MMG > 13 0 4 1 40 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-44
Cavalry HQ 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-44
Bicycle Infantry 13 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - 8 39-44
Bicycle MMG > 16 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 39-44
Bicycle HQ 12 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - 8 39-44
ATR Squad 11 2 3 20 20 - 6 ** 4F - 4 41-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

45

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: FRANCE
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

French Tanks
FT-17 MG 10 0 5 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 3T - - 31-40
FT-17 11 2 3 32 20 - [1/1/1/1] 3T - - 31-40
AMC-35 36 5 3 48 20 - [3/2/1/1] 17T - - 35-40
AMR-33 25 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 17T - - 35-40
AMR-35 24 2 3 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 17T - - 36-40
Char B1 28 1 5^ 60 60 - [5/3/3/2] 7T - - 39-40
5 3 48 20 - - -
FCM-36 25 2 4 32 20 - [4/4/3/2] 11T - - 39-40
Char B1 32 5 4 48 20 - [4/3/2/1] 11T - - 39-40
Char D2 32 5 4 48 20 - [4/3/2/1] 11T - - 39-40
H-35 22 2 3 32 20 - [3/3/2/2] 11T - - 35-40
H-39 30 4 3 40 20 - [4/3/2/2] 13T - - 39-40
R-35 20 2 3 32 20 - [4/3/2/2] 8T - - 35-40
R-40 27 4 3 40 20 - [4/2/2/1] 12T - - 1940
S-35 38 5 4 48 20 - [4/3/2/2] 16T - - 35-40
French Anti-Tank Weapons
25mm ATG ^ 9 3 2 28 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 34-40
47mm ATG ^ 12 5 2 48 20 - 4 0 - 6 37-40
French Anti-Aircraft Weapons
20mm ATG > 14 2 5 40 40 - 4 0 - 4 30-40
25mm ATG > 15 2 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 6 30-40
75mm ATG > 40 7 5 80 80 - 2 0 - 12 30-40
French Artillery
60mm Mortar (1) ^ 16 0 4# 60 60 4 6 ** 4F - 2 37-40
Cavalry 60mm Mtr (2) ^ 26 0 4# 60 60 4 6 ** 11F - - 37-40
M/C 60mm Mortar (1) 30 0 4# 60 60 4 6 ** 27W - - 39-40
81mm Mortar (1) ^, S 33 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 4 31-40
81mm Mortar (2) ^, S 61 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 8 31-40
75mm Gun Mod 1897 ^, S 48 1 5# 216 216 2 4 0 - 6 01-40
75mm Gun Mod 1936 ^, S 48 1 5# 216 216 2 4 0 - 6 36-40
105mm Howitzer ^, S 137 2 8# 385 385 4 2 0 - 8 36-40
155mm Howitzer ^, S 158 3 9# 370 370 4 2 0 - 8 17-40
French Armoured Cars
Panhard 178 23 3 4 28 20 - [2/1/1/1] 21W - - 39-40
French Armoured Personnel Carriers
Lorraine 37L 7 - - - - - [1/1/1]/2 11T 8 - 39-40
French Transport Vehicles
Cart 3 - - - - - 1 8F 6 - 39-40
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 39-40
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 39-40
Light Truck 7 - - - - - 1 27W 6 - 39-40

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

46

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR

French Transport Vehicles, continued

Medium Truck 8 - - - - - 1 24W 8 - 39-40
Heavy Truck 9 - - - - - 1 21W 12 - 39-40
UE Chenillette 5 - - - - - [1/1/1]/2 11T 4 - 39-40
CP19 Halftrack 8 - - - - - 1 16T 8 - 39-40
MCG-5 Halftrack 10 - - - - - [1/1/1/1] 16T 10 - 39-40
French Personnel
Infantry 12 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-40
Infantry HQ 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-40
Engineer 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 6 39-40
Infantry MG (MMG) 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 6 39-40
Cavalry 10 0 5 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-40
Cavalry MMG > 14 0 4 1 40 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-40
Cavalry HQ 8 0 3 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-40
Motorcycle Infantry 28 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 39-40
Motorcycle MMG > 30 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 27W - - 39-40
Motorcycle HQ 25 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 39-40

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

47

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: GERMANY
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

German Tanks
PzI 22 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 16T - - 34-41
PzI Befelswagen ^ 17 0 3 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 16T - - 39-43
PzII D-J 26 2 5 20 20 - [3/2/1/1] 15T - - 39-43
PzII L 32 2 5 20 20 - [3/2/1/1] 21T - - 43-45
Pz 35T 28 4 4 36 20 - [2/1/1/1] 14T - - 39-40
Pz 38T 30 5 4 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 14T - - 38-43
PzIII D-E 31 4 4 36 20 - [4/3/3/1] 14T - - 38-42
PzIII F-G 41 5 4 48 48 - [4/3/3/1] 14T - - 41-42
PzIII H 44 5 4 48 48 - [6/3/6/2] 14T - - 41-43
PzIII J-L 51 6 4 60 60 - [6/3/4/2] 14T - - 41-45
PzIII Befelswagen ^ 20 0 3 1 20 - [6/3/6/2] 14T - - 42-45
PzIV F2-J 77 9 5 80 80 - [7/4/4/1] 13T - - 42-45
PzV A-G (Panther) 106 11 5 100 100 - [11/4/4/1] 16T - - 43-45
PzVI A (Tiger I) 102 10 6 100 100 - [9/5/5/2] 12T - - 43-45
PzVI B (Tiger II) 115 12 6 100 100 - [12/7/7/3] 11T - - 44-45
Tiger Maus 154 13 7 120 120 - [18/14/15/8} 6T - - 45-47?
E-100 154 13 7 120 120 - [18/9/13/8] 11T - - 45-47?
German Anti-Tank Weapons
28mm 41LE ^ 9 4 2 20 20 - 5 ** 2F - 2 41-44
37mm PaK 35 ^ 9 3 2 32 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 36-45
50mm PaK 38 ^ 19 6 4 48 48 - 5 0 - 6 41-45
75mm PaK 97 ^ 20 6 5 48 48 - 5 0 - 6 41-43
76mm PaK 36 ^ 36 8 5 80 80 - 4 0 - 8 41-45
75mm PaK 40 ^ 38 9 5 80 80 - 4 0 - 8 42-45
88mm PaK 41/43 ^ 64 11 5 120 120 - 4 0 - 10 43-45
128mm PaK 44 ^ 124 12 7 160 160 - 3 0 - 14 44-45
PanzerJäger I ^ 21 5 2 40 40 - [1/1/]/1/1 13T - - 40-41
76mm Diana ^ 55 8 5 80 80 - [2/1/1]/1 14T - - 1942
Marder II-III (76mm) ^ 56 8 5 80 80 - [2/1/]/1/1 15T - - 42-45
Marder II-III (75mm) ^ 58 9 5 80 80 - [2/1/]/1/1 15T - - 42-45
STuG III F-G ^ 61 9 5 80 80 - [7/3/3/2] 13T - - 42-45
STuG IV ^ 61 9 5 80 80 - [7/3/3/2] 13T - - 42-45
Nashorn ^ 80 11 6 100 100 - [2/1/1]/1 13T - - 43-45
Elefant ^ 87 11 6 100 100 - [12/6/4/2] 12T - - 43-45
Hetzer ^ 58 8 5 80 80 - [8/3/3/1] 13T - - 44-45
Jagdpanzer IV L48 ^ 60 9 5 80 80 - [9/2/2/1] 13T - - 44-45
Jagdpanzer IV L70 ^ 78 11 5 100 100 - [9/2/2/1] 10T - - 44-45
Jagdpanther ^ 88 11 6 100 100 - [11/4/4/1] 15T - - 44-45
Jagdtiger ^ 111 12 7 120 120 - [13/6/6/2] 12T - - 1945
PaK 40 RSO ^ 57 9 5 80 80 - [1]/2/2/1 13T - - 43-45
Sdkfz 251/22 ^ 62 9 5 80 80 - [2/1/1]/1 19T - - 44-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

48

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
German Anti-Tank Weapons, continued
Sdkfz 234/4 ^ 57 9 5 80 80 - [3/1/1]/1 21W - - 44-45
German Anti-Aircraft Weapons
20mm Flak 30 > 16 2 4 40 40 - 4 ** 1F - 4 35-45
20mm FlaK 36 > 18 2 5 40 40 - 4 ** 1F - 4 41-45
20mm Quad > 21 3 8 40 40 - 4 0 - 6 41-45
37mm Flak 37 18 4 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 6 36-45
88mm Flak 36 98 9 6 160 160 - 2 0 - 10 36-45
Sdkfz 10/20mm > 37 2 5 40 40 - 2 21T - - 38-45
Sdkfz 10/37mm 42 4 6 40 40 - 2 20T - - 38-45
Sdkfz 7/37mm 41 4 6 40 40 - [2]/1/1/1 19T - - 42-45
Sdkfz 7/Quad 20mm > 43 3 8 40 40 - [2]/1/1/1 19T - - 41-45
Sdkfz 251/17 > 37 2 5 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 41-45
Sdkfz 251/21 Drilling > 40 2 7 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 20T - - 44-45
Flakpanzer 38T > 31 2 5 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 15T - - 43-44
Wirbelwind > 41 3 8 40 40 - [5/3/3]/2 13T - - 1945
Ostwind 39 4 6 40 40 - [5/3/3]/2 13T - - 1945
Kugelblitz 45 5 8 40 40 - [6/3/3/1] 13T - - 45-47?
German Artillery
50mm Mortar (1) ^ 9 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F - 2 36-42
50mm Mortar (2) ^ 12 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F - 4 36-42
50mm Mortar (3) ^ 16 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F - 6 36-42
81mm Stummel (1) ^, S 15 0 6# 38 38 3 6 ** 4F - 4 42-45
81mm Stummel (2) ^, S 25 0 6# 38 38 3 6 ** 4F - 8 42-45
81mm Mortar (1) ^, S 27 0 6# 84 84 3 6 ** 3F - 4 34-45
81mm Mortar (2) ^, S 50 0 6# 84 84 3 6 ** 3F - 8 34-45
120mm Mortar ^, S 84 2 9# 210 210 13 4 0 - 8 42-45
Sdkfz 251/2 81mm ^, S 42 0 6# 84 84 3 [2/1/1]/1 20T - - 40-45
Sdkfz 250/7 81mm ^, S 43 0 6# 84 84 3 [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 42-45
75mm Infantry Gun ^, S 30 1 5 108 108 2 5 1F - 6 34-44
150mm Infantry Gun ^, S 59 2 9# 148 148 3 2 0 - 10 34-45
75mm Mountain Gun ^, S 71 2 5# 280 280 2 3 0 - 8 36-45
105mm Howitzer ^, S 125 3 8# 330 330 3 2 0 - 10 34-45
150mm Howitzer ^, S 179 3 9# 420 420 3 2 0 - 10 38-45
170mm Gun ^ 413 4 11 # 780 780 4 2 0 - 14 41-45
75mm LG40 RR ^ 63 3 6 160 160 2 3 1F - 4 40-43
105mm LG41 RR ^ 116 4 9# 250 250 3 2 0 - 6 41-44
105mm LG42 RR ^ 125 5 9# 250 250 3 2 0 - 6 42-45
150mm SiG33 Pz I ^, S 73 2 9 148 148 3 [1/1]/1/1 8T - - 39-40
150mm SiG33 Pz II ^, S 76 2 9 148 148 3 [2/1/1]/1 11T - - 42-43
150mm Lorraine ^, S 75 2 9 148 148 3 [1/1/1]/1 11T - - 41-45
105mm Wespe ^, S 163 2 8# 340 340 3 [2/1/1]/1 13T - - 42-45
150mm Bison ^, S 83 2 9# 148 148 3 [2/1/1]/1 11T - - 43-45
150mm Hummel ^, S 244 3 9# 420 420 3 [3/1/1]/1 12T - - 43-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

49

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
German Rocket Artillery
150mm Nebelwerfer ^, ! 29 4 10 # 220 220 50 3 0 - 6 41-45
210mm Nebelwerfer ^, ! 45 5 12 # 288 288 50 3 0 - 8 43-45
Sdkfz 251 280mm ^, ! 29 4 10 # 64 64 12 [2/1/1]/1 20T 8 - 42-45
Stuka Zu Fuss
Panzerwerfer ^, ! 54 4 10 # 220 220 50 [2/1/1/1] 20T - - 44-45
150mm Maultier
German Infantry Close Support Artillery Vehicles
Sdkfz 251/9 75mm ^ 44 1 5 108 108 2 [2/1/1]/1 20T - - 42-45
Sdkfz 250/8 75mm ^ 44 1 5 108 108 2 [2/1/1]/1 20T - - 44-45
Sdkfz 233 75mm ^ 42 1 5 108 108 2 [3/2/1]/1 21W - - 41-45
Sdkfz 234/3 75mm ^ 38 1 5 108 108 2 [3/1/1]/1 21W - - 44-45
STuG III A-E ^ 41 1 5 108 108 - [5/3/3]/1 13T - - 40-43
StuH42 ^ 68 3 8 120 120 - [7/3/4/2] 13T - - 42-45
Brummbar ^ 79 2 9 148 148 - [7/3/3/1] 11T - - 44-45
Sturmtiger ^, ! 41 9 18 80 80 - [12/6/6/2] 11T - - 44-45
Pz III N 55 1 5 108 108 - [7/4/5/2] 14T - - 43-45
Pz IV C-D 50 1 5 108 108 - [4/2/2/1] 13T - - 37-41
Pz IV E 52 1 5 108 108 - [5/4/3/1] 13T - - 40-42
Pz IV F1 53 1 5 108 108 - [7/4/4/1] 13T - - 41-43
German Armoured Cars
Sdkfz 221 18 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 20W - - 37-41
Sdkfz 222 20 2 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 20W - - 38-43
Sdkfz 223 18 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 20W - - 38-43
Sdkfz 231 6 RAD 20 2 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 20W - - 34-40
Sdkfz 231 8 RAD 24 2 4 20 20 - [3/2/1/1] 24W - - 38-45
Sdkfz 263 ^ 16 0 4 1 20 - [3/2/1/1] 21W - - 39-45
Sdkfz 234/1 25 2 4 20 20 - [3/1/1/1] 27W - - 44-45
Sdkfz 234/2 Puma 42 6 4 48 48 - [4/1/1/1] 24W - - 44-45
Sdkfz 250/9 29 2 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 21T - - 42-45
Sdkfz 251/16 Flamm 23 9 9 2 2 - [2/1/1]/1 19T - - 40-45
Sdkfz 140/1 22 2 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 14T - - 44-45
German Armoured Personnel Carriers
Sdkfz 247 9 - - - - - [1/1/1]/1 27W 8 - 40-45
Sdkfz 251/1 12 0 4 1 20 - [2/1/1]/1 20T 8 - 40-45
Sdkfz 251/10 12 3 2 20 20 - [2/1/1]/1 20T 8 - 41-45
Sdkfz 250/1 10 0 4 1 20 - [2/1/1]/1 21T 4 - 42-45
Sdkfz 250/10 10 3 2 20 20 - [2/1/1]/1 21T 4 - 42-45
Sdkfz 251/11 13 4 2 20 20 - [2/1/1]/1 21T 8 - 42-45
German Transport Vehicles
Cart 3 - - - - - 2 8F 6 - 39-45
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 34-45
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 34-45
Kubelwagen 7 - - - - - 3 27W 4 - 40-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

50

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
German Transport Vehicles, continued
Schwimmwagen 7 - - - - - 3 27W/3A 4 - 42-45
Light Truck 8 - - - - - 1 24W 8 - 34-45
Medium Truck 10 - - - - - 1 24W 12 - 34-45
Heavy Truck 11 - - - - - 1 21W 15 - 34-45
Light Tractor 10 - - - - - 1 21T 8 - 35-45
Medium Tractor 11 - - - - - 1 20T 12 - 38-45
Heavy Tractor 13 - - - - - 1 19T 15 - 38-45
German Personnel
Infantry ‘39 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 36-42
Infantry ‘43 12 3 5 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 43-44
Infantry ‘44 13 6 5 6 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Panzergrenadier ‘41 12 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 41-42
Panzergrenadier ‘43 13 3 6 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 43-44
Panzergrenadier ‘44 13 6 5 6 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Panzergrenadier SMG 12 6 6 4 16 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Volksgrenadier 12 6 6 4 16 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Volksgrenadier HQ 12 6 6 4 16 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 39-45
Infantry HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-45
Para Infantry ‘39 12 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-42
Para Infantry ‘43 13 3 6 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 43-44
Para Infantry ‘44 14 6 6 6 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Para HQ 12 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-45
Recon infantry 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 4 43-45
Recon HQ 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 43-45
Cavalry 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 34-45
Cavalry MMG > 13 0 4 1 40 - 5 ** 8F - - 34-45
Cavalry HQ 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 34-45
Motorcycle Infantry 28 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 38-45
Motorcycle MMG > 30 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 27W - - 38-45
Motorcycle HQ 26 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 38-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

51

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: HUNGARY
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

Hungarian Tanks
L3/35 ^ 14 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 41-42
PzI Befelwagon ^ 17 0 3 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 16T - - 41-43
Pz 38T 30 5 4 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 14T - - 42-43
Toldi 21 2 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 13T - - 41-43
Toldi IIA 26 4 4 32 20 - [3/1/1/1] 13T - - 42-43
Turan I 32 5 4 40 20 - [4/2/1/1] 14T - - 42-43
Pz IV F2 77 9 5 80 80 - [7/4/4/1] 13T - - 43-45
Pz VI A (Tiger I) 102 10 6 100 100 - [9/5/5/2] 12T - - 43-45
Hungarian Anti-Tank Weapons
37mm PaK 35 ^ 9 3 2 32 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 41-45
40mm ATG ^ 12 4 2 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 41-45
45mm ATG Model 1932 ^ 12 4 2 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 42-45
47mm ATG ^ 14 5 3 40 20 - 4 0 - 4 42-45
50mm PaK 38 ^ 19 6 4 48 48 - 5 0 - 6 42-45
75mm PaK 40 ^ 38 9 5 80 80 - 4 0 - 8 42-45
Hetzer ^ 58 8 5 80 80 - [8/3/3/1] 13T - - 44-45
STuG III G ^ 61 9 5 80 80 - [7/3/3/2] 13T - - 44-45
Hungarian Infantry Close Support Artillery Vehicles
Turan II 42 1 5 80 80 - [4/2/1/1] 14T - - 42-43
Pz III N 55 1 5 108 108 - [7/4/5/2] 14T - - 42-45
Pz IV F1 53 1 5 108 108 - [7/4/4/1] 13T - - 42-45
Zrinyi ^ 56 4 8 80 80 - [8/5/2/1] 14T - - 43-45
Hungarian Armoured Cars
Csaba 20 2 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 20W - - 42-45
Sdkfz 222 20 2 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 20W - - 42-45
Hungarian Anti-Aircraft Weapons
AAMG > 10 1 4 40 40 - 4 0 - 4 41-45
40mm AAG > 19 4 6 40 40 - 4 0 - 6 41-45
80mm AAG 48 7 6 90 90 - 2 0 - 8 41-45
Nimrod 36 4 6 40 40 - [2/1/1/]/1 14T - - 42-45
Hungarian Artillery
50mm Mortar (2) 12 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F - 6 41-45
Cavalry 50mm Mortar (2) ^ 11 0 4# 20 20 3 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Bicycle 50mm Mortar (2) ^ 14 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F/4W - - 41-45
M’cycle 50mm Mortar (2) ^ 27 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 27W - - 41-45
81mm Mortar (1) ^, S 33 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 4 41-45
81mm Mortar (2) ^, S 61 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 8 41-45
120mm Mortar ^, S 93 2 9# 230 230 24 5 0 - 8 42-45
75mm Gun Mod 1897 ^, S 44 1 5 216 216 2 4 0 - 6 41-45
75mm Mtn Howitzer ^, S 22 0 5# 111 111 2 4 0 - 6 41-45
76.5mm Gun ^, S 48 1 5# 216 216 2 4 0 - 6 41-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

52

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
Hungarian Artillery, continued
100mm Howitzer ^ 104 2 8# 290 290 4 3 0 - 10 41-45
105mm Gun ^, S 152 3 8# 384 384 4 2 0 - 10 41-45
105mm Howitzer ^, S 130 3 8# 330 330 3 2 0 - 10 41-45
122mm Howitzer ^, S 145 3 8# 370 370 4 3 0 - 10 41-45
149mm How Mod 14 ^ 121 2 9# 310 310 6 2 0 - 12 41-45
150mm Howitzer ^, S 258 3 9# 370 370 4 2 0 - 10 41-45
Hungarian Armoured Personnel Carriers
Sdkfz 250/1 10 0 4 1 20 - [2/1/1]/1 21T 4 - 42-45
Hungarian Transport Vehicles
Cart 3 - - - - - 2 8F 6 - 41-45
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 41-45
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 41-45
Pack Horses 5 - - - - - 2 5F 8 - 41-45
Kubelwagen 7 - - - - - 3 27W 4 - 41-45
Light Tractor 10 - - - - - 1 21T 8 - 41-45
Light Truck 8 - - - - - 1 24W 8 - 41-45
Heavy Truck 9 - - - - - 1 21W 12 - 41-45
Hungarian Personnel
Infantry ’41 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 41-42
Infantry ‘42 11 1 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 42-43
Infantry ’44 12 4 5 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 41-45
20mm ATR 10 2 3 16 16 - 6 ** 3F - 4 41-45
Infantry HQ 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 41-45
Cavalry 10 0 5 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Cavalry MMG 13 0 4 1 40 - 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Cavalry 20mm ATR 9 2 3 16 16 - 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Cavalry HQ 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Bicycle Infantry ‘41 13 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 41-44
Bicycle Infantry ‘44 14 4 5 4 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 44-45
Bicycle MMG 16 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 41-45
Bicycle 20mm ATR 12 2 3 16 16 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 41-45
Bicycle HQ 12 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - 8 41-45
Mountain Infantry ‘41 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 41-45
Mountain Infantry ‘44 12 4 5 4 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 44-45
Mountain HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 41-45
Motorcycle Infantry 27 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 41-45
Motorcycle 20mm ATR 26 2 3 16 16 - 6 ** 27W - - 41-45
Motorcycle HQ 26 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 41-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

53

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: ITALY
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

Italian Tanks
L3/35 ^ 14 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 33-43
L3/35 20mm ^ 15 2 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 33-43
L3/35 Flame thrower ^ 13 9f 9f 3 3 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 41-43
L6/40 23 2 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 15T - - 41-43
M11/39 18 0 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 39-41
3 0^ 32 32 - - -
M13/40 31 4 4 40 40 - [3/2/2/1] 11T - - 40-43
M15/42 45 6 4 60 60 - [4/2/2/1] 11T - - 1943
P26/40 65 7 5 80 80 - [5/3/2/1] 11T - - 1943
Italian Anti-Tank Weapons
20mm ATR 10 2 2 20 20 - 6 ** 3F - 4 36-43
37mm ATG ^ 9 3 2 32 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 36-43
47mm ATG ^ 16 4 4 40 40 - 4 1F - 4 40-43
75mm ATG ^ 33 7 5 80 80 - 3 0 - 8 42-43
Semovente 47 ^ 24 4 4 40 40 - [3/1/1]/1 11T - - 41-43
Semovente 75/34 ^ 51 7 5 80 80 - [4/2/2/1] 11T - - 1943
Semovente 90 ^ 68 9 6 100 100 - [4]/2/1/1 8T - - 1943
90mm Portee 87 9 6 100 100 - 1 18W - - 41-42
102mm/35 Portee 97 9 8 100 100 - 1 18W - - 41-42
102mm/47 Portee 101 10 8 100 100 - 1 17W - - 41-42
Italian Anti-Aircraft Weapons
20mm AAG > 15 2 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 6 36-43
75mm AAG 41 7 5 80 80 - 3 0 - 8 37-43
90mm AAG 62 9 6 100 100 - 2 0 - 10 37-43
20mm Portee > 31 2 6 40 40 - 1 24W - - 36-43
Italian Artillery
45mm Mortar (3) 16 0 4# 21 21 14 6 ** 4F - 8 36-43
81mm Mortar (1) ^ 39 0 6# 128 128 3 6 ** 3F - 4 36-43
65mm Gun ^ 33 0 4# 216 216 2 4 0 - 6 13-43
75mm Gun Model 27 ^ 49 1 5 240 240 3 4 0 - 8 12-43
75mm Gun Model 35 ^ 73 1 5# 400 400 3 4 0 - 8 34-43
75mm Mountain How. ^ 66 1 5# 300 300 3 4 0 - 6 34-43
105mm Mountain How. ^ 92 1 8# 280 280 3 4 0 - 8 34-43
100mm Howitzer ^ 104 2 8# 290 290 4 3 0 - 10 15-43
105mm Howitzer ^ 150 3 8# 420 420 4 3 0 - 10 29-43
149mm How. Model 14 ^ 121 2 9# 310 310 6 2 0 - 12 16-43
149mm How. Model 35 ^ 322 4 9# 700 700 6 2 0 - 12 36-43
65mm Portee ^ 48 0 4# 216 216 2 1 18W - - 42-43
75mm Portee ^ 73 1 5# 240 240 3 1 16W - - 42-43
100mm Portee ^ 136 2 8# 290 290 4 1 14W - - 42-43

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

54

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
Italian Infantry Close Support Artillery Vehicles
Semovente 75/18 ^ 35 2 5 80 80 - [4/2/2/1] 11T - - 41-43
Semovente 105 ^ 46 2 8 80 80 - [5/3/2/1] 11T - - 1943
Italian Armoured Cars
Autoblinda 40 (AB40) 20 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 24W - - 40-43
Autoblinda 41 (AB41) 22 2 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 24W - - 41-43
Carro Commando ^ 15 1 3 20 20 - [4/2/2/1] 11T - - 41-43
Sahariana MG > 22 0 6 20 20 - 2 24W - - 41-43
Sahariana 20mm ATR 20 2 2 20 20 - 2 24W - - 41-43
Sahariana 47mm ATG 31 4 4 40 40 - 2 21W - - 41-43
Sahariana 20mm AAG > 31 2 6 40 40 - 2 21W - - 41-43
Italian Transport Vehicles
Car 6 - - - - - 2 24W 4 - 36-43
Light Truck 7 - - - - - 1 24W 6 - 36-43
Medium Truck 7 - - - - - 1 21W 8 - 36-43
Heavy Truck 9 - - - - - 1 19W 12 - 36-43
Light Tractor 7 - - - - - [1/1/1/1] 11T 8 - 36-43
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 36-43
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 36-43
Pack Horses 5 - - - - - 2 5F 8 - 36-43
Italian Personnel
Infantry 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 36-43
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 36-43
Infantry HMG (HMG) > 22 2 6 40 40 - 6 ** 2F - 8 36-43
20mm ATR 10 2 3 16 20 - 6 ** 2F - 8 36-43
Infantry HQ 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 36-43
Bersaglieri Infantry 13 0 7 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 36-43
Bersaglieri M/C 27 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 36-43
Bersaglieri M/C MMG > 32 0 5 1 40 - 6 ** 27W - - 36-43
M/C Infantry 26 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 36-43
Motorcycle HQ 25 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 36-43
Cavalry 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 36-43
Cavalry MMG > 13 0 4 1 40 - 5 ** 8F - - 36-43
Cavalry HQ 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 36-43
Bicycle Infantry 13 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - 8 36-41
Bicycle HQ 12 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - 8 36-41
Alpini Infantry 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 36-43
Parachute Infantry 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 36-43
Parachute HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 36-43

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

55

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: JAPAN
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

Japanese Tanks
Type 92 Tankette 19 0 6 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 33-45
Type 94 Tankette 17 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 32-45
Type 97 Tankette (TeKe Type I) 21 0 4 1 40 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 37-45
Type 97 Tankette (TeKe Type II) 22 3 4 32 20 - [1/1/1/1] 11T - - 38-45
Type 95 26 3 4 32 20 - [1/1/1/1] 15T - - 36-45
Type 97 Chi-Ha 29 3 4 32 20 - [2/2/2/1] 16T - - 38-45
Type 97 Shinhoto Chi-Ha 36 6 4 40 20 - [2/2/2/1] 15T - - 42-45
Type 89b 20 3 4 32 20 - [2/1/1/1] 9T - - 31-45
Type I Ka-Mi 26 3 4 32 20 - [1/1/1/1] 15T/3A - - 43-45
Type I Chi-He 33 6 4 40 20 - [4/2/2/1] 13T - - 43-45
Type III Chi-Nu 42 7 4 60 20 - [4/2/2/1] 13T - - 1945
Japanese Anti-Tank Weapons
37mm ATG ^ 10 3 2 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 35-45
47mm ATG ^ 15 5 4 60 20 - 4 0 - 6 42-45
Ho-Ni ^ 32 7 4 60 20 - [4/2]/1/1 11T - - 44-45
Japanese Anti-Aircraft Weapons
20mm AA/AT 21 2 6 40 40 - 5 ** 1F - 4 39-45
40mm AA/AT 22 5 7 40 40 - 4 0 - 8 32-45
25mm AAG 16 2 6 40 40 - 4 0 - 6 37-45
Dual 25mm AAG 18 2 7 40 40 - 4 Fixed - - 37-45
Triple 25mm AAG 19 2 8 40 40 - 4 Fixed - - 37-45
Japanese Artillery
50mm Mortar (1) 12 0 4# 26 26 5 6 ** 4F - 2 31-45
50mm Mortar (2) 18 0 4# 26 26 5 6 ** 4F - 4 31-45
50mm Mortar (3) 24 0 4# 26 26 5 6 ** 4F - 8 31-45
Cavalry 50mm Mortar (2) 17 0 4# 26 26 5 5 ** 11F - - 31-45
81mm Mortar (2) ^ 56 0 6# 96 96 4 6 ** 3F - 8 38-45
90mm Mortar (2) ^ 57 1 7# 150 150 24 5 0 - 8 34-45
105mm Mortar ^ 36 3 9# 78 78 12 5 0 - 6 38-45
70mm Howitzer ^ 25 0 5# 88 88 2 6 ** 1F - 4 33-45
75mm Howitzer ^, S 62 1 5# 280 280 2 4 0 - 8 09-45
105mm Howitzer ^, S 160 3 8# 410 410 4 2 0 - 10 32-45
150mm Howitzer ^, S 115 3 9# 270 270 4 2 0 - 12 16-45
150mm Ho-Ro ^, S 96 2 8# 188 188 4 [2/1/1]/1 13T - - 43-45
Japanese Armoured Cars
Sumida 26 0 5 1 40 - [1/1/1/1] 24W - - 34-45
Japanese Armoured Personnel Carriers
Ho-Ki 10 - - - - - [1/1/1]/1 16T 10 - 44-45
Japanese Transport Vehicles
Car 7 - - - - - 2 27W 4 - 35-45
Truck 9 - - - - - 1 20W 12 - 31-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

56

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 FIREPOWER RANGE
POINT MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
Japanese Transport Vehicles, continued
Artillery Tractor 8 - - - - - 1 8T 12 - 33-45
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 31-45
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 31-45
Pack Horses 5 - - - - - 2 5F 8 - 31-45
Japanese Personnel
Infantry 12 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 31-45
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 31-45
Infantry HQ 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 31-45
Cavalry 10 0 5 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 31-45
Cavalry MMG > 13 0 4 1 40 - 5 ** 11F - - 31-45
Cavalry HQ 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 31-45
20mm ATR 10 2 3 16 16 - 6 ** 3F - 4 39-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

57

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: POLAND
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

Polish Tanks
TKS ^ 11 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 8T - - 33-39
TKSz ^ 12 2 3 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 8T - - 36-39
7TPdw 18 0 5 1 20 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 34-39
7TPjw 20 2 4 32 20 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 36-39
Vickers Mark E (B) 26 0 5 40 40 - [3/2/1/1] 12T - - 36-39
Vickers Mark E (A) 32 4 4 40 40 - [3/2/1/1] 12T - - 36-39
Polish Anti-Tank Weapons
37mm ATG ^ 14 5 2 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 36-39
Polish Anti-Aircraft Weapons
20mm AAG > 15 2 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 4 36-39
40mm AAG 18 4 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 6 30-39
Polish Artillery
46mm Mortar (3) ^, S 26 0 4# 31 31 4 6 ** 4F - 8 37-39
81mm Mortar (2) ^, S 69 0 6# 120 120 4 6 ** 3F - 4 31-39
75mm Infantry Gun ^, S 19 0 4 120 120 2 5 0 - 8 20-39
75mm Field Gun ^, S 54 1 5# 240 240 2 4 0 - 8 26-39
100mm Howitzer ^, S 104 2 8# 290 290 4 3 0 - 8 33-39
105mm Howitzer ^, S 158 3 8# 400 400 4 4 0 - 8 20-39
155mm Howitzer ^, S 159 3 9# 370 370 4 4 0 - 10 20-39
Bicycle 46mm Mortar (2) 18 0 4# 31 31 4 6 ** 4F/4W - - 37-39
Polish Armoured Cars
WZ29 20 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 24W - - 29-39
WZ34 24 2 4 32 20 - [1/1/1/1] 24W - - 34-39
Polish Vehicles
Car 6 - - - - - 2 24W 4 - 20-39
Light Truck 8 - - - - - 1 24W 8 - 20-39
Heavy Truck 9 - - - - - 1 21W 12 - 20-39
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 20-39
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 20-39
Polish Personnel
Infantry 13 0 7 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 20-39
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 20-39
Infantry HQ 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 20-39
Bicycle Infantry 13 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 20-39
Bicycle MMG 16 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 20-39
Bicycle HQ 12 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F/4W - - 20-39
Cavalry 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 20-39
Taczanka ^^, > 11 0 4 1 40 - 3 8F - - 20-39
Cavalry HQ 8 0 3 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 20-39
Motorcycle Infantry 26 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 20-39

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

58

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: ROMANIA
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

Romanian Tanks
R-1 20 1 4^ 40 40 - [1/1/1/1] 13T - - 41-45
0 3 1 20 - - -
R-2 28 4 4 36 20 - [2/1/1/1] 14T - - 41-45
R-35/45 28 4 3 40 20 - [4/3/2/2] 8T - - 43-45
R-35 20 2 3 32 20 - [4/3/2/2] 8T - - 41-45
Pz38T 30 5 4 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 14T - - 42-43
Pz III N 55 1 5 108 108 - [7/4/5/2] 14T - - 42-45
Pz IV G 77 9 5 80 80 - [7/4/4/1] 13T - - 42-45
Romanian Anti-Tank Weapons
37mm ATG ^ 10 3 2 32 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 41-43
45mm ATG Model 1932 ^ 12 4 2 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 42-45
47mm ATG ^ 13 4 4 40 40 - 4 0 - 4 41-45
50mm PaK 38 ^ 21 6 4 48 48 - 5 0 - 6 42-45
75mm Resita ATG ^ 38 9 5 80 80 - 4 0 - 8 43-45
75mm PaK 97 ^ 20 6 5 48 48 - 5 0 - 6 42-45
75mm PaK 40 ^ 38 9 5 80 80 - 4 0 - 8 42-45
TACAM T-60 ^ 54 8 5 80 80 - [2/1/]1/1 13T - - 44-45
TACAM R-2 ^ 52 8 5 80 80 - [2/1/]1/1 11T - - 44-45
STuG III G ^ 61 9 5 80 80 - [7/3/3/2] 13T - - 44-45
Romanian Armoured Cars
Sdkfz 222 20 2 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 20W - - 42-45
Romanian Anti-Aircraft Weapons
AAMG > 11 1 4 40 40 - 4 0 - 4 41-45
20mm AAG > 14 2 5 40 40 - 4 0 - 4 41-45
25mm AAG > 15 2 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 6 41-45
75mm AAG 24 2 5 80 80 - 2 0 - 10 41-45
Romanian Artillery
60mm Mortar (1) ^, S 16 0 4# 63 63 4 6 ** 4F - 2 41-45
60mm Mortar (2) ^, S 27 0 4# 63 63 4 6 ** 4F - 4 41-45
60mm Mortar (3) ^, S 39 0 4# 63 63 4 6 ** 4F - 6 41-45
81mm Mortar (1) ^, S 33 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 4 41-45
81mm Mortar (2) ^, S 61 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 8 41-45
120mm Mortar ^, S 92 2 9 230 230 24 5 0 - 8 42-45
75mm Gun Model 1897 ^, S 44 1 5 216 216 2 4 0 - 6 41-45
75mm Mtn Howitzer ^, S 22 0 5# 111 111 2 4 0 - 6 41-45
100mm Mtn Howitzer ^, S 79 1 7# 274 274 3 3 0 - 6 41-45
100mm Howitzer ^ 104 2 8# 290 290 4 3 0 - 10 41-45
105mm Gun ^, S 150 3 8# 384 384 4 2 0 - 10 41-45
150mm Howitzer ^, S 158 3 9# 370 370 4 2 0 - 10 41-45
Romanian Armoured Personnel Carriers
Sdkfz 251/1 12 0 4 1 20 - [2/1/1]/1 20T 8 - 42-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

59

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 FIREPOWER RANGE
POINT MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR

Romanian Transport Vehicles

Cart 3 - - - - - 2 8F 6 - 41-45
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 41-45
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 41-45
Malaxa Tractor 5 - - - - - [1/1/1]/2 11T 4 - 41-45
Light Tractor 9 - - - - - 1 21T 8 - 41-45
Light Truck 7 - - - - - 1 27W 6 - 41-45
Medium Truck 9 - - - - - 1 24W 10 - 41-45
Heavy Truck 10 - - - - - 1 21W 14 - 41-45
Romanian Personnel
Infantry ‘41 13 0 7 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 41-42
Infantry ‘42 11 1 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 42-43
Infantry ‘44 12 4 5 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Infantry HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 41-45
Motorized Infantry ‘41 12 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 41-42
Motorized Infantry ‘42 12 1 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 42-43
Motorized Infantry ‘44 13 4 6 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 44-45
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 41-45
Cavalry 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Cavalry MMG 13 0 4 1 40 - 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Cavalry HQ 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 41-45
Mountain Infantry 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 41-45
Mountain HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 41-45
Motorcycle Infantry 27 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 41-45
Motorcycle HQ 26 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 41-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

60

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: SOVIET UNION
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

Soviet Tanks
T-26 Model 1933 21 3 3 32 20 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 33-36
T-26 Model 1937 24 4 3 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 37-42
T-37A 23 1 3 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 17T/3A - - 35-41
T-40 27 2 3 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 20T - - 40-42
T-60 29 2 3 20 20 - [3/2/2/1] 20T - - 42-43
T-70 36 4 3 40 20 - [4/2/2/1] 21T - - 42-44
OT-130 15 9f 9f 2 2 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 39-41
BT-5/BT-7 38 5 3 40 40 - [1/1/1/1] 20T - - 33-41
T-35 39 1 5 136 136 - [3/2/2/1] 8T - - 35-41
5 3 40 20 - - -
M3 Stuart 44 5 4 40 40 - [4/3/3/2] 20T - - 42-44
M3 Grant 49 7 5^ 80 80 - [6/4/2/2] 13T - - 42-44
5 4 40 40 - - -
M4 Sherman 70 7 5 80 80 - [7/4/4/3] 13T - - 43-45
M4 Sherman (76mm) 76 9 5 80 80 - [8/4/4/3] 13T - - 44-45
T-34 A 54 7 5 48 48 - [6/6/4/2] 16T - - 41-42
T-34 B-F 68 8 5 64 64 - [8/6/5/2] 16T - - 41-45
T-34/85 91 10 6 80 80 - [8/6/5/2] 16T - - 44-45
KV-1A 54 7 5 48 48 - [10/6/6/3] 13T - - 41-43
KV-1C 67 8 5 64 64 - [10/6/6/3] 13T - - 42-43
KV-85 88 10 6 80 80 - [10/5/5/2] 13T - - 43-44
JSII 98 11 7 80 80 - [13/8/4/2] 12T - - 44-45
JSIII 100 11 7 80 80 - [13/8/7/3] 12T - - 1945?
Soviet Anti-Tank Weapons
37mm ATG ^ 9 3 2 32 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 32-41
45mm ATG Model 1932 ^ 12 4 2 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 32-45
45mm ATG Model 1942 ^ 16 6 3 40 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 42-45
57mm ATG ^ 26 8 4 60 60 - 5 0 - 6 43-45
100mm ATG ^ 58 11 7 96 96 - 4 0 - 10 44-45
SU-57 ^ 43 6 4 60 60 - [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 1942
SU-76 ^ 52 7 5 80 80 - [3/2/2]/1 13T - - 43-45
SU-76i ^ 49 8 5 64 64 - [7/3/3/2] 13T - - 43-44
SU-85 ^ 72 10 6 80 80 - [9/6/5/2] 15T - - 44-45
SU-100 ^ 79 11 7 80 80 - [11/6/5/2] 15T - - 44-45
JSU-122 ^ 82 11 8 80 80 - [12/8/6/2] 12T - - 44-45
Soviet Anti-Aircraft Weapons
AAMG > 19 1 6 40 40 - 5 ** 1F - 8 39-45
37mm AAG 18 4 6 40 40 - 3 0 - 6 39-45
76mm AAG 41 7 5 80 80 - 3 0 - 6 39-45
85mm AAG 44 7 6 80 80 - 3 0 - 8 39-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

61

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
Soviet Anti-Aircraft Weapons, continued
AAMG Truck 33 1 8 40 40 - 1 24W - - 39-45
SU-37-1 37 4 6 40 40 - [3/2/2]/1 13T - - 43-45
M-17 MGMC > 42 1 8 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 43-45
Soviet Artillery
50mm Mortar (1) ^ 11 0 4# 30 30 3 6 ** 4F - 2 39-42
50mm Mortar (2) ^ 16 0 4# 30 30 3 6 ** 4F - 4 39-42
50mm Mortar (3 ^ 21 0 4# 30 30 3 6 ** 4F - 6 39-42
50mm Mortar (4) ^ 26 0 4# 30 30 3 6 ** 4F - 8 39-42
82mm Mortar (2) ^, S 70 0 6# 122 122 3 6 ** 3F - 8 37-45
107mm Mortar ^, S 70 1 7# 240 240 24 4 0 - 8 39-45
120mm Mortar ^, S 93 2 9# 230 230 24 5 0 - 8 38-45
76mm Infantry Gun ^, S 32 1 5# 136 136 2 5 0 - 6 27-45
76mm Model 1936 ^, S 94 1 5# 430 430 2 4 0 - 8 39-45
(ATG Mode) 8 80
122mm Howitzer ^, S 145 3 8# 370 370 4 3 0 - 10 38-45
152mm Howitzer ^, S 185 4 9# 400 400 4 3 0 - 12 37-45
203mm Howitzer ^ 306 4 11 # 576 576 6 2 0 - 14 38-45
Soviet Rocket Artillery
82mm Katyusha ^, ! 36 1 9# 216 216 70 1 21W - - 41-45
132mm Katyusha ^, ! 71 4 12 # 334 334 110 1 21W - - 41-45
300mm Katyusha ^, ! 37 7 14 # 110 110 30 1 21W - - 42-45
310mm Katyusha ^, ! 57 7 15 # 188 188 60 1 21W - - 43-45
Soviet Infantry Close Support Vehicles
BT-7A 62 1 5 136 136 - [1/1/1/1] 20T - - 36-41
T-28 61 1 5 136 136 - [5/4/4/2] 13T - - 39-41
KV-2 76 4 9 80 80 - [8/6/6/3] 12T - - 40-41
SU-122 ^ 72 3 8 120 120 - [9/6/5/2] 13T - - 43-44
SU-152 ^ 60 4 9 80 80 - [9/6/5/2] 12T - - 43-44
JSU-152 ^ 63 4 9 80 80 - [12/8/6/2] 12T - - 44-45
Soviet Armoured Cars
BA-20 20 0 5 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 21W - - 37-41
BA-10 26 4 3 40 20 - [1/1/1/1] 21W - - 34-43
BA-64 23 0 5 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 27W - - 43-45
Soviet Transport Vehicles
Cart 3 - - - - - 2 8F 6 - 39-45
Wagon 5 - - - - - 1 5F 10 - 39-45
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 39-45
GAZ Jeep 4 - - - - - 3 24W 4 - 39-45
Light Truck 7 - - - - - 1 24W 8 - 39-45
Medium Truck 8 - - - - - 1 21W 10 - 39-45
Heavy Truck 9 - - - - - 1 19W 12 - 39-45
Light Tractor 5 - - - - - 1 16T 6 - 39-45
Heavy Tractor 8 - - - - - 1 13T 12 - 39-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

62

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 FIREPOWER RANGE
POINT MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR

Soviet Personnel
Infantry ‘39 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-41
Infantry ‘42 11 1 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 Early ‘42
Infantry ‘43 10 3 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 Late 42-45

Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 41-45

SMG Infantry 10 1 6 1 12 - 6 ** 4F - 8 41-45
Recon Infantry 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 4 42-45
ATR Squad 11 2 3 20 20 - 6 ** 4F - 4 41-45
Infantry HQ 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 6 39-45
Cavalry 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-45
Cavalry HQ 8 0 3 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-45
Taczanka ^^, > 9 0 4 1 40 - 3 8F - - 39-45
Motorcycle Infantry 27 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 39-45
Motorcycle HQ 26 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 39-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

63

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: UNITED KINGDOM
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

UK Tanks
Vickers Mk VI 28 1 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 21T - - 36-42
A-9 26 5 3 40 40 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 37-41
A-10 27 5 3 40 40 - [3/1/1/1] 11T - - 38-41
A-13 30 5 3 40 40 - [2/1/1/1] 15T - - 38-41
A-11 (Matilda I) 15 0 3 1 20 - [6/5/4/1] 4T - - 37-40
A-12 (Matilda II) 31 5 3 40 20 - [8/5/5/2] 8T - - 40-43
M3 Honey 44 5 4 40 40 - [4/3/3/2] 20T - - 41-45
M3 Grant 49 7 5^ 80 80 - [6/4/2/2] 13T - - 42-45
5 4 40 40
M4 Sherman 70 7 5 80 80 - [7/4/4/3] 13T - - 42-45
Tetrach 35 5 3 40 20 - [1/1/1/1] 20T - - 41-45
Crusader I 33 5 3 40 20 - [4/2/2/1] 16T - - 40-43
Crusader III 41 6 3 60 20 - [4/2/2/1] 16T - - 42-43
Valentine II 33 5 3 40 20 - [6/5/4/2] 11T - - 41-42
Valentine IX 41 6 3 60 20 - [6/5/4/2] 11T - - 42-43
Valentine XI 68 7 5 80 80 - [6/5/4/2] 11T - - 43-45
Churchill I 40 1 5^ 120 120 - [8/6/5/2] 8T - - 41-42
5 3 40 20 - - -
Churchill IV 40 6 3 60 20 - [8/6/5/2] 8T - - 42-45
Churchill VI 70 7 5 80 80 - [12/7/6/2] 8T - - 44-45
Churchill Crocodile 70 7 5 80 80 - [12/7/6/2] 8T - - 44-45
9f 9f ^ 3 3
Cromwell I 49 6 3 60 20 - [6/4/4/1] 20T - - 1943
Cromwell IV 74 7 5 80 80 - [7/3/2/1] 20T - - 44-45
Challenger 100 11 5 100 100 - [6/4/3/1] 13T - - 44-45
Sherman Firefly 102 11 5 100 100 - [7/3/4/2] 13T - - 44-45
Comet 87 10 5 80 80 - [7/3/4/1] 20T - - 1945
UK Anti-Tank Weapons
25mm ATG ^ 9 3 2 28 20 - 5 ** 1F - 4 39-41
2-lbr ATG 14 5 2 40 20 - 5 0 - 4 39-45
6-lbr ATG ^ 22 6 4 60 60 - 4 0 - 6 42-45
17-lbr ATG ^ 54 11 5 100 100 - 4 0 - 8 43-45
2-lbr Portee ^^ 20 5 2 40 20 - 1 21W - - 41-42
6-lbr Portee ^^ 28 6 3 60 20 - 1 21W - - 1943
T-48 GMC ^ 35 6 3 60 20 - [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 43-45
Archer ^^ 78 11 5 100 100 - [5/5/1]/1 11T - - 44-45
Achilles 99 11 5 100 100 - [6/3/3]/2 13T - - 44-45
UK Anti-Aircraft Weapons
SP 20mm Polston 31 2 6 40 40 - 1 24W - - 44-45
SP 40mm Bofors 35 4 6 40 40 - 1 24W - - 43-45
40mm Bofors 18 4 6 40 40 - 1 24W - 6 43-45
3.7” AAG 74 9 6 120 120 - 2 0 - 8 39-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

64

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
UK Anti-Aircraft Weapons, continued
Mk VI AA 37 1 8 30 30 - [2/1/1/1] 0 - - 42-44
Crusader MkI AA 38 4 6 40 40 - [2]/1/1/1 16T - - 44-45
Crusader MkII AA 36 2 6 40 40 - [4/2/2/1] 16T - - 44-45
AAMG Truck > 23 0 4 40 40 - 1 24W - - 40-43
AAMG Jeep > 25 0 4 40 40 - 3 24W - - 41-43
UK Artillery
2” Mortar (1) (51mm) ^, S 9 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F 2 39-45
2” Mortar (3) (51mm) ^, S 16 0 4# 20 20 3 6 ** 4F - 6 39-45
3” Mortar (1) (81mm) ^, S 26 0 6# 80 80 5 6 ** 3F - 6 39-45
3” Mortar (2) (81mm) ^, S 48 0 6# 80 80 5 6 ** 3F - 6 39-45
2” Mtr/Bren (1) (51mm) ^, S 21 0 4# 20 20 3 [1/1/1]/1 20T - - 39-45
1 4 20 20 -
4.2” Mortar (107mm) ^, S 52 1 9# 140 140 24 4 0 - 8 42-45
18-lbr (76mm) S 53 0 6# 240 240 4 3 0 - 8 39-41
25-lbr (87mm) S 196 2 7# 390 390 4 3 0 - 8 39-45
(ATG Mode) 6 40 -
3.7” Mtn How (95mm) ^, S 53 1 6# 160 160 4 4 1F - 4 39-45
4.5” Howitzer (110mm) ^ 75 2 8# 210 210 4 2 0 - 10 39-45
5.5” Gun (140mm) ^ 216 4 9# 470 470 4 2 0 - 12 41-45
6.0” how. (152mm) ^ 275 4 9# 600 600 4 1 0 - 14 39-45
7.2” How. (183mm) ^ 346 4 10 # 700 700 4 1 0 - 14 42-45
Bishop (87mm) ^, S 167 2 7# 390 390 4 [3/2/1]/1 11T - - 42-43
Sexton (87mm) ^, S 169 2 7# 390 390 4 [3/1/1]/1 13T - - 43-45
UK Infantry Close Support Artillery Vehicles
A-9 (CS - “Close Support”) 61 1 7 120 120 - [2/1/1/1] 11T - - 37-41
A-10 (CS) 62 1 7 120 120 - [3/1/1/1] 11T - - 38-41
A-13 (CS) 65 1 7 120 120 - [2/1/1/1] 15T - - 38-41
Crusader I (CS) 56 1 5 120 120 - [4/2/2/1] 16T - - 40-42
Matilda II (CS) 54 1 5 120 120 - [8/5/5/2] 8T - - 40-43
Churchill (CS) 70 1 7 120 120 - [12/7/6/2] 8T - - 44-45
Churchill AVRE ! 45 7 16 80 80 - [12/7/6/2] 8T - - 44-45
Cromwell (CS) 80 2 7 120 120 - [7/3/2/1] 20T - - 1945
UK Armoured Cars
Rolls Royce 23 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 29W - - 36-41
Morris 21 1 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 23W - - 38-41
Marmon Herrington 19 0 4 1 20 - [1/1/1/1] 21W - - 40-43
Marmon Herrington (20mm) 21 2 4 20 20 - [1/1/1/1] 21W - - 40-43
Humber II 22 1 4 20 20 - [2/1/1/1] 24W - - 41-45
Humber IV 29 5 3 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 23W - - 44-45
Daimler Dingo 21 0 3 1 20 - [2/1/1/1] 27W - - 39-45
Daimler AC 32 5 3 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 27W - - 42-45
A.E.C. I 28 5 3 40 20 - [3/1/1/1] 21W - - 42-45
A.E.C. II 36 6 3 60 20 - [3/1/1/1] 21W - - 43-45
A.E.C. III 63 7 5 80 80 - [3/1/1/1] 20W - - 44-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

65

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
UK Armoured Cars, continued
Staghound I 28 5 3 40 20 - [2/1/1/1] 21W - - 43-45
Staghound III 63 7 5 80 80 - [2/1/1/1] 21W - - 44-45
Bren Wasp 25 9f 9f 3 3 - [1/1/1]/1 20T - - 39-45
UK Armoured Personnel Carriers
Bren 11 1 4 20 20 - [1/1/1]/1 20T 6 - 39-45
M3 Halftrack (.30 cal) 14 0 4 1 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21T 8 - 43-45
Kangaroo 12 0 4 1 40 - [5/2/1]/1 13T 8 - 44-45
UK Transport Vehicles
Limber 6 - - - - - 1 8F 12+ - 39-40
Car 3 - - - - - 2 21W 4 - 39-45
Light Truck 8 - - - - - 1 24W 8 - 39-45
Medium Truck 9 - - - - - 1 24W 10 - 39-45
Heavy Truck 10 - - - - - 1 21W 14 - 39-45
Crusader Tractor 9 - - - - - [2/1/1]/1 16T 8 - 44-45
Heavy Tractor 10 - - - - - 1 13T 12 - 39-45
UK Personnel
Infantry ‘39 11 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-42
Infantry ‘43 12 5 5 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 43-45
Infantry HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-45
Para Infantry ‘42 10 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 42-43
Para Infantry ‘43 12 5 5 4 20 - 6 ** 5F - 8 43-45
Engineer ‘39 11 2 5 2 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 39-42
Engineer ‘43 12 5 5 4 20 - 6 ** 4F - 8 43-45
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F - 8 39-45
Recon Infantry 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 5F - 4 43-45
Cavalry 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-41
Cavalry HQ 9 0 4 1 20 - 5 ** 11F - - 39-41
Motorcycle Infantry 27 0 5 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 39-41
Motorcycle HQ 26 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 27W - - 39-41

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

66

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Weapons Data: UNITED STATES
POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ.

US Tanks
M3 Stuart 44 5 4 40 40 - [4/3/3/2] 20T - - 42-44
M3 Satan 28 9f 9f 2 2 - [4/3/3/2] 20T - - 43-45
M5 Stuart 45 5 4 40 40 - [5/3/3/2] 20T - - 43-45
M24 Chaffee 75 7 5 80 80 - [6/4/2/2] 20T - - 44-45
M3 Grant 49 7 5^ 80 80 - [6/4/2/2] 13T - - 42-43
5 4 40 40 - - -
M4 Sherman 70 7 5 80 80 - [7/4/4/3] 13T - - 42-45
M4 Ronson 25 9f 9f 3 3 - [7/4/4/3] 13T - - 44-45
M4 Sherman (76mm) 78 9 5 80 80 - [8/4/4/3] 13T - - 44-45
M4 Sherman (Jumbo) 80 9 5 80 80 - [10/7/4/3] 12T - - 44-45
M4A3E8 Sherman (Easy 8) 80 9 5 80 80 - [8/6/5/3] 13T - - 44-45
M26 Pershing 97 11 7 80 80 - [11/7/5/3] 12T - - 1945
US Anti-Tank Weapons
37mm ATG ^ 16 5 4 32 32 - 5 ** 1F - 4 42-45
57mm ATG ^ 22 6 4 60 60 - 4 0 - 6 42-45
76mm ATG ^ 38 9 5 80 80 - 3 0 - 8 44-45
M6 GMC ^^ 23 5 4 32 32 - 2 21W - - 1942
M3 GMC ^ 55 7 5 80 80 - [2/1/1]/1 19T - - 42-44
M10 (Wolverine) 75 9 5 80 80 - [6/3/3]/2 13T - - 43-45
M18 (Hellcat) 81 9 5 80 80 - [6/3/3]/2 19T - - 44-45
M36 (Jackson) 87 11 6 80 80 - [6/3/3]/2 13T - - 44-45
US Anti-Aircraft Weapons
.50 cal AAMG > 11 1 4 40 40 - 4 0 - 4 42-45
40mm Bofors 18 4 6 40 40 - 2 0 - 6 42-45
90mm AAG 62 9 6 100 100 - 2 0 - 10 42-45
M13 MGMC > 36 1 5 40 40 - [2/2/1]/1 21T - - 42-45
M15 MGMC > 43 3 7 40 40 - [2/2/1]/1 20T - - 42-45
M15 Special 43 4 6 40 40 - [2/2/1]/1 20T - - 42-45
M16 MGMC > 42 1 8 40 40 - [2/2/1]/1 21T - - 42-45
US Artillery
60mm Mortar (1) ^, S 20 0 4# 63 63 4 6 ** 4F - 2 42-45
60mm Mortar (2) ^, S 34 0 4# 63 63 4 6 ** 4F - 4 42-45
60mm Mortar (3) ^, S 48 0 4# 63 63 4 6 ** 4F - 6 42-45
60mm Mortar (4) ^, S 62 0 4# 63 63 4 6 ** 4F - 8 42-45
81mm Mortar (1) ^, S 41 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 4 42-45
81mm Mortar (2) ^, S 76 0 6# 105 105 4 6 ** 3F - 8 42-45
4.2” Mortar (107mm) ^, S 42 1 7# 140 140 24 4 0 - 8 42-45
75mm Pack Howitzer ^, S 91 1 5# 260 260 2 5 ** 1F - 4 42-45
105mm Howitzer ^, S 140 3 8# 355 355 4 3 0 - 10 42-45
155mm Howitzer ^, S 221 4 9# 480 480 4 2 0 - 12 42-45
203mm Howitzer ^ 305 5 11 # 540 540 6 2 0 - 14 43-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

67

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR
US Artillery continued
240mm Howitzer ^ 545 7 14 # 735 735 6 2 0 - 16 43-45
M4 MMC (81mm) ^^, S 46 0 6# 96 96 4 [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 42-45
M21 MMC (81mm) ^, S 46 0 6# 96 96 4 [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 43-45
T30 HMC (75mm) ^, S 85 1 5# 250 250 2 [2/1/1]/1 20T - - 42-43
T19 HMC (105mm) ^, S 188 3 8# 350 350 4 [2/1/1]/1 19T - - 42-43
M8 HMC (75mm) S 119 1 5# 275 275 2 [5/3/3]/1 20T - - 43-45
M7 HMC (105mm) ^, S 183 3 8# 350 350 4 [4/1/1]/1 12T - - 43-45
M12 HMC (155mm) ^, S 407 5 9# 640 640 4 [4/1/1]/1 12T - - 44-45
M40 GMC (155mm) ^, S 475 5 9# 750 750 4 [3/1/1]/1 12T - - 1945
US Infantry Close Support Artillery Vehicles
M4 Sherman (105mm) 169 3 8# 240 240 2 [7/4/4/3] 13T - - 42-45
LVTA4 (75mm) 108 1 5# 275 275 2 [2/1/1]/2 13T/4A - - 44-45
US Armoured Cars
Jeep (.30 cal MG) 23 0 3 40 40 - 3 24W 4 - 42-45
Jeep (.50 cal MG) 27 1 4 40 40 - 3 24W 4 - 42-45
M3 MMG 37 1 6 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21T - - 42-45
M8 (Greyhound) 33 5 4 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21W - - 43-45
M20 23 1 3 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21W - - 43-45
T8 Stuart 34 1 3 40 40 - [4/3/3]/2 20T - - 44-45
LVTA 1 37 5 6 40 40 - [1/1/1]/1 13T/4A - - 44-45
US Armoured Personnel Carriers
M3 Scout Car 14 1 5 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21W 8 - 42-45
M3 Halftrack 10 - - - - - [2/1/1]/1 21T 8 - 42-45
M3 Halftrack (.30 cal) 14 0 4 1 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21T 8 - 42-45
M3 Halftrack (.50 cal) 15 1 4 40 40 - [2/1/1]/1 21T 8 - 42-45
LVT-1 13 1 3 40 40 - 1 10T/3A 12 - 42-43
LVT-2 16 1 3 40 40 - [1/1/1]/1 13T/4A 16 - 43-45
US Transport Vehicles
Jeep 6 - - - - - 3 24W 4 - 42-45
Peep 6 - - - - - 3 24W/3A 4 - 42-45
Weasel 5 - - - - - 3 13T/3A 4 - 42-45
Light Truck 8 - - - - - 1 24W 8 - 42-45
Medium Truck 10 - - - - - 1 24W 12 - 42-45
Heavy Truck 11 - - - - - 1 21W 15 - 42-45
M5 Tractor 8 - - - - - 1 16T 10 - 43-45
M4 Tractor 12 - - - - - 1 15T 16 - 44-45
DUKW 10 - - - - - 1 20W/5A 14 - 42-45
Cart 3 - - - - - 2 4F 6 - 42-45
US Personnel
Infantry ‘42 12 0 6 1 20 - 6 ** 4F 8 - 42-43
Infantry ‘43 14 5 6 6 20 - 6 ** 4F 8 - 43-45
Headquarters ‘42 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F 8 - 42-43
Headquarters ‘43 12 5 4 6 20 - 6 ** 4F 8 - 43-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

68

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 POINT FIREPOWER RANGE MIN. DEFENSE SPEED CARGO TRANS
WEAPON VALUE AP HE AP HE RANGE [F/S/R/T] W/T/F CAP. REQ. YEAR

US Personnel, continued
Para Infantry ‘42 13 0 7 1 20 - 6 ** 5F 8 - 42-43
Para Infantry ‘43 15 5 7 6 20 - 6 ** 5F 8 - 43-45
Para HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 5F 8 - 42-45
Ranger ‘42 13 0 7 1 20 - 6 ** 5F 8 - 42-43
Ranger ‘43 15 5 7 6 20 - 6 ** 5F 8 - 43-45
Ranger HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 5F 8 - 42-45
Marine ‘42 13 0 7 6 20 - 6 ** 4F 8 - 42-43
Marine ‘44 14 2 7 6 20 - 6 ** 4F 8 - 44-45
Marine HQ 10 0 4 1 20 - 6 ** 4F 8 - 42-45
Infantry MG (MMG) > 14 0 4 1 40 - 6 ** 3F 8 - 42-45
Infantry HMG (HMG) > 20 1 6 40 40 - 6 ** 2F 8 - 42-45
Recon Infantry 9 0 3 1 20 - 6 ** 5F 4 - 42-45

Symbols ^ = Limited frontal firing arc ! = Rocket weapon. May only fire once every 4 turns.
^^ = Limited rear firing firing arc # = May employ indirect fire
S = May fire smoke missions ** = Defense value halved if fired on while in
> = May lay down a Beaten Zone movement or fire/move posture.

69

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 AIRCRAFT DATA
POINT FIREPOWER BOMB LOAD IMPACT ROCKET LOAD
AIRCRAFT YEAR
VALUE AP HE AP HE MARKER SIZE AP HE
UNITED STATES
P-39 Airacobra 74 4 10 3 6 (1) 3” x 3” - - 1942
P-40 Kittyhawk 62 1 10 3 6 (1) 3” x 3” - - 1942
P-38F Lightning 120 2 10 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” - - Late 1942
P-38L Lightning 120 2 10 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 1943
P-47C Thunderbolt 86 1 16 3 6 (1) 3” x 3” - - 1943
P-47D Thunderbolt 140 1 16 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 1943
P-51D Mustang 124 1 12 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 1944
F4U-1D Corsair 120 2 10 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 1944
F6F-5 Hellcat 124 1 12 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 Late 1944
SBD Dauntless 56 1 4 6 12 (1) 4” x 4” - - 1942
GERMANY
JU-87 B-1 56 1 4 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” - - 1939
JU-87 D-1 80 1 4 10 20 (1) 4” x 4” - - 1941
JU-87 G-1 36 5 4 - - - - - 1943
HS123 68 2 6 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” - - 1936
HS129 B-1 144 2 16 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” - - Late 1942
HS129 B-2 52 5 8 - - - - - 1943
HS129 B-3 44 7 4 - - - - - Late 1944
FW190 F 140 2 12 7 14 (2) 4” x 4” - - 1943
FW190 D-9 112 2 8 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” - - 1943
ME109 G-6 68 2 6 3 6 (1) 3” x 3” - - 1942
ME110 C-1 92 2 12 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” - - 1939
ME110 F-1 100 2 12 3 8 (2) 3” x 3” - - 1941
SOVIET UNION
Polikarpov I-153 38 1 6 - - - - - 1934
Polikarpov I-16 68 2 6 2 6 (2) 3” x 3” 4 12 1937
Ilyushin IL-2M 112 2 8 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 Late 1942
Ilyushin IL-2M3 116 5 6 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 Late 1943
Ilyushin IL-10 60 2 4 6 12 (1) 4” x 4” 4 12 1944
Yakolev YAK-9D 50 2 6 3 6 (1) 3” x 3” - - 1943
UNITED KINGDOM
Hawker Hurricane IIC 76 2 8 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” - - 1941
Hawker Hurricane IID 36 5 4 - - - - Late 1942
Hawker Hurricane IV 72 1 8 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” 4 12 1943
Hawker Typhoon IB 112 2 8 6 12 (2) 4” x 4” 4 12 1943
Supermarine Spitfire XVI 92 2 12 3 6 (2) 3” x 3” 4 12 1944
ITALY
CR42 Falcon 28 1 4 - - - - - 1939
RE2001 68 2 8 3 6 (1) 3” x 3” - - 1941
JAPAN
A6M2 Zero 52 2 6 2 4 (1) 3” x 3” - - 1941
D3A Val 56 1 4 6 12 (1) 4” x 4” - - 1941

70

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Firing Target
Arc side

Firing Target
Arc side
You may photocopy these templates and the Combat Table Card for personal use only. GHQ, 2004. We suggest using white card stock. Laminate them for more durability.

Road Road Road Road Road Road Road

block block block block block block block

mine mine mine mine mine mine mine

field field field field field field field

smoke smoke smoke smoke smoke smoke smoke

Barbed Barbed Barbed Barbed Barbed Barbed Barbed

wire wire wire wire wire wire wire

breach breach breach breach breach breach breach

wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck

wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 1
8 n 2
wreck wreck wreck wreck nw ne

7 w e 3
wreck wreck wreck wreck
se sw

6 s 4
wreck wreck wreck wreck 5

wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck wreck

light light light light light light

improved improved improved improved improved improved
position position position position position position

light light light light light light

improved improved improved improved improved improved
position position position position position position

light light light light light light

improved improved improved improved improved improved
position position position position position position

medium medium medium medium medium medium

improved improved improved improved improved improved
position position position position position position

heavy heavy heavy heavy heavy heavy

improved improved improved improved improved improved
position position position position position position

You may photocopy these templates and the Combat Table Card for personal use only. GHQ, 2004.
We suggest using white card stock. Laminate them for more durability.

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 smoke smoke

smoke smoke

smoke smoke
You may photocopy these templates and the Combat Table Card for personal use only. GHQ, 2004.
We suggest using white card stock. Laminate them for more durability.

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 smoke

smoke smoke smoke smoke

smoke

smoke smoke smoke smoke

smoke

smoke smoke smoke smoke

smoke

smoke smoke smoke smoke

smoke

smoke smoke smoke smoke

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 impact
impact

impact

impact
impact
You may photocopy these templates and the Combat Table Card for personal use only. GHQ, 2004.
We suggest using white card stock. Laminate them for more durability.

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 impact

impact impact impact impact

impact

impact impact impact impact

impact

impact impact impact impact

impact

impact

impact impact impact

You may photocopy these templates and the Combat Table Card for personal use only. GHQ, 2004
We suggest using white card stock. Laminate them for more durability.

impact

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Unit data sheet
NATIONALITY

COHESION BREAK POINT

UNIT TYPE UNIT TYPE

Cargo Capacity Cargo Capacity

AP AP
VALUE/RANGE VALUE/RANGE

HE Facing HE Facing
VALUE/RANGE Restricted? VALUE/RANGE Restricted?
MINIMUM MINIMUM
RANGE RANGE
Transport Transport
DEFENSE Front Side Required DEFENSE Front Side Required
VALUE VALUE

Rear Top Movement Rear Top Movement

Value/Class Value/Class

UNIT TYPE UNIT TYPE

Cargo Capacity Cargo Capacity

AP AP
VALUE/RANGE VALUE/RANGE

HE Facing HE Facing
VALUE/RANGE Restricted? VALUE/RANGE Restricted?
MINIMUM MINIMUM
RANGE RANGE
Transport Transport
DEFENSE Front Side Required DEFENSE Front Side Required
VALUE VALUE

Rear Top Movement Rear Top Movement

Value/Class Value/Class

UNIT TYPE UNIT TYPE

Cargo Capacity Cargo Capacity

AP AP
VALUE/RANGE VALUE/RANGE

HE Facing HE Facing
VALUE/RANGE Restricted? VALUE/RANGE Restricted?
MINIMUM MINIMUM
RANGE RANGE
Transport Transport
DEFENSE Front Side Required DEFENSE Front Side Required
VALUE VALUE

Rear Top Movement Rear Top Movement

Value/Class Value/Class

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Unit Roster sheet
Unit ID# UNit Type Transport ID# Transport Type

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Artillery plotting sheet
Target
impact turn firing unit ID# FO UNit ID# Sheaf Pattern HE or SMOKE?
Location

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro Squad Combat Table Card ®

Sequence of play Air Strike Procedure

1. INITIATIVE PHASE BEFORE GAME BEGINS:
1D6 + Cohesion. Highest total has initiative this turn. 1. Record turns in which air strike(s) arrive.
2. Plot strike location(s) including “sheaf” orientation
2. POSTURE DETERMINATION PHASE (see Indirect Artillery Fire for guidelines.)
Moving or firing this turn?
Mark each desired stand or group in fire/move or TURN OF AIR STRIKE ARRIVAL:
movement posture. 1. Attacker reveals air strike target(s) and declares
attack “type” (i.e. strafing, rockets, bombs.)

3. JOINT ARTILLERY FIRE PHASE 2. Defender declares AA fire. (See Anti-Aircraft

Players alternate executing artillery fire attacks. (See Procedure below.)
Direct Artillery & Indirect Artillery Fire Procedure Charts.) 3. Roll cohesion
4. Roll for deviation. If successful, go to step 6.
4. JOINT STANDARD FIRE PHASE Otherwise go to step 5.
Players alternate executing standard fire attacks. 5. Roll 1D8 for air strike direction and 2D6 for distance.
Any one stand may be attacked once per fire phase. (Strafing missions must maintain original sheaf
(See Standard Fire Procedure Chart.) pattern and orientation.)
6. Ascertain defense class of target.
5. JOINT PLOT PHASE
Players alternate plotting artillery fire missions for 7. Select appropriate aircraft attack value (i.e. strafing,
future turns. rockets, bombs.)
8. Subtract defense strength from attack value to
obtain “attack superiority.”
6. JOINT MOVEMENT PHASE
Roll on the Command Efficiency Table for number of 9. Roll 2D6 on the Combat Results Table (CRT.)
orders. Alternate executing moves, including opportu- 10. Modify the total rolled by applicable terrain on the
nity and covering fire. Stands that enter artillery Terrain Effects Chart.
impact markers suffer attacks.
11. Cross-reference the modified die roll and attack
superiority on the CRT and apply the result.
7. MARKER REMOVAL PHASE
Remove movement, fired, and impact markers.
Attempt cohesion rolls to remove “S” markers. “D”
markers can only be removed with a natural die roll of AA Fire Procedure
“1” (see marker removal procedure).
TURN OF AIR STRIKE ARRIVAL
1. Enemy AA weapons in firing posture and within
Movement orders chart range of intended air strike may attempt AA fire.
Roll cohesion for each stand. Successful stands
CONDITION DIE-ROLL EFFECT affect air strike cohesion die roll as follows:
GHQ eliminated No further orders allowed • Each stand of 40mm caliber or less: +2
• Each stand of greater than 40mm caliber: +1
Each HQ or GHQ stand
-2 2. Total AA modifiers.
attached to group
Unit or group under order No effect 3. Perform cohesion die roll for air strike arrival
[R] unit or group without modified by enemy AA fire. Failure aborts the strike.
No effect
order Notes:
Other unit or group without • AA stands may not fire on aircraft and ground targets
+3 in the same turn.
order
Unit “Suppressed” +4 • AA stands may fire at all aircraft in range, regardless of
how many there are.
Unit “Disorganized” +3

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Command Efficiency table direct
Modified Die Roll
3- 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13+ artillery fire Procedure
0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
Number of Orders 1. Identify target location(s).
2. Designate attacking stand(s).
Overrun Procedure 3. Roll for cohesion, modified for terrain, etc.
4. (Mortars only) roll for deviation.
1. Perform all movement by all stands connected with
this overrun. 5. Ascertain defense class of target.
2. Defender makes cohesion roll for each attacking stand. 6. Select appropriate attacker firepower.
3. A +3 modifier is applied if the attacker is a “tracked” 7. Subtract defense strength from firepower to obtain
vehicle. “attack superiority.”
4. Defender suffers one attack at +5 superiority for each 8. Roll two six-sided dice.
failed cohesion roll. 9. Modify the total rolled by applicable terrain on the
5. Each attacking stand makes one cohesion die roll. Terrain Effects Table.
6. Each attacking stand that fails cohesion die roll 10. Cross-reference the modified die roll and attack
suffers an attack at 2+ superiority. superiority on the CRT and apply the result.
Note: Armored personnel carriers may only perform
overruns when carrying personnel stands.
indirect
close assault Procedure artillery fire Procedure
1. If not in movement posture, defender rolls for cohesion.
1. Refer to the appropriate turn’s plotted indirect fire.
2. If successful, attack one assaulting stand with a -3 die
roll modifier. 2. Roll for cohesion for each firing stand, modified for
3. Each assaulting stand makes one cohesion roll. terrain.
4. If successful, each assaulting stand attacks with a -3 3. Roll for deviation. If successful, skip to step 5.
die roll modifier. 4. Roll 1D8 for direction and 1D6 for distance of deviation.
5. If disorganized, defending stand must move 1 inch Impact markers must maintain original sheaf pattern.
away from assaulting stands. 5. Ascertain defense strength class of target.
Notes:
6. Select appropriate attacker firepower.
1. Assaulting engineers attack with a -6 die roll modifier.
2. Mounted cavalry strengths doubled assaulting 7. Subtract defense strength from firepower to obtain
unarmoured stands. “attack superiority.”
3. Die roll modifiers per the terrain effects table are not 8. Roll two six-sided dice.
applicable. 9. Modify the total rolled by applicable terrain on the
terrain effects.
standard fire Procedure 10. Cross reference the modified die roll and attack
superiority on the CRT and apply the result.
FOR EACH ATTACK:
1. Designate target stand.
2. Designate all attacking stands. Check line of sight. marker removal Procedure
FOR EACH FIRING STAND:
1. Roll for cohesion, modified for firer “S” and “D” 1. Remove all movement and “fired” markers.
effects, and terrain.
2. Select appropriate attacker firepower required. 2. Roll 1D20 for each stand with “S” and/or “D”
markers.
3. Subtract defense strength from firepower to obtain
“attack superiority.” • To remove “S” marker: Pass cohesion roll, modified
4. Roll two six-sided dice. for “S” (+4). Stand recovers.
5. Modify the total rolled by applicable Terrain and Range • To remove “D” marker: Roll unmodified “1”.
Effects Charts. Stand rallys.
6. Cross-reference the modified die roll and attack
superiority on the CRT and apply the result. • If die roll equals “20”, stand suffers (S). Stand panics!

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Combat results table
Combat Differential
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9
19 - - - - - - - - - - - S S 19
18 - - - - - - - - - - S S (S) 18
17 - - - - - - - - - S S (S) (S) 17
16 - - - - - - - - S S (S) (S) D 16
15 - - - - - - - - S (S) (S) D D 15
14 - - - - - - - S (S) (S) D D D 14
13 - - - - - - S S (S) D D D D 13
Die Roll

12 - - - - - S S (S) D D D D E 12
11 - - - - S S (S) (S) D D D E E 11
10 - - - - S (S) (S) D D D E E E 10
9 - - - S (S) (S) D D E E E E E 9
8 - - S S (S) D D D E E E E E 8
7 - S S (S) D D D E E E E E E 7
6 S S (S) (S) D D D E E E E E E 6
5 S (S) (S) D D D E E E E E E E 5
4 (S) (S) D D D E E E E E E E E 4
3 (S) D D D E E E E E E E E E 3
2 D D D D E E E E E E E E E 2
1 D D D E E E E E E E E E E 1
0 D D E E E E E E E E E E E 0
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9
• Attacks at less than -3 are not normally allowed EFFECTS:
(see artillery below) - = No effect
• Artillery only may attack at less than -3 (result S = “Suppressed” +4 added to all cohesion rolls for this stand.
is “S”) Effect is not increased by further “S” results.
• Treat all attacks greater than +9 as +9 attacks. (S) = “Suppressed” If the stand has already suffered a “suppres-
sion” result this turn, convert the “(S)” result to a “D.” Otherwise,
• Modified die rolls less than 0 are treated as 0. treat it as an “S” result.
• Modified die rolls may not exceed 19 D = Disorganized +3 added to all cohesion rolls for the remainder
of the game unless it rallys. If the stand is already disorganized,
remove it from play.
E = Eliminated Remove stand from play.

Terrain effects chart (continued on next page)

MOVEMENT POINT COST PER 25 METERS FIRING UNIT COHESION & IS LINE OF SIGHT
TERRAIN TYPE
TRACKED UNIT WHEELED UNIT FOOT UNIT CRT DIE ROLL EFFECT BLOCKED?
Clear 1 2 1 none no
Woods 3 4 1 +4 Personnel, +2 Otherwise yes#
Grove 2 3 1 +2 Personnel, +1 Otherwise yes#
Gravel Plain 1 1.5 1 none no
Broken Rock 2 5 1.5 none no
Soft Sand, Marsh Mud 4 8 3 -1 if target in movement posture no
Gentle Slope +1 2 +1 none yes#
Steep Slope +3 not allowed +2 +1** yes
Hilltop or Ridge Crest +1 +3 +1 +2** yes
Rough Terrain 1 1 3 1 +2 Personnel, +1 Otherwise yes personnel, no otherwise
Rough Terrain 2 2 5 1.5 +4 Personnel, +2 Otherwise yes personnel, no otherwise
Rough Terrain 3 3 7 3 +6 Personnel, +4 Otherwise yes#
Light Improved Position 2 3 1 +4 Personnel, +1 Otherwise no#

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Terrain effects chart (continued from last page)
MOVEMENT POINT COST PER 25 METERS FIRING UNIT COHESION & IS LINE OF SIGHT
TERRAIN TYPE
TRACKED UNIT WHEELED UNIT FOOT UNIT CRT DIE ROLL EFFECT BLOCKED?
Med. Improved Position 2 4 1 +5 Personnel, +2 Otherwise no#
Hvy. Improved Position 3 not allowed 2 +7 Personnel, +3 Otherwise no#
Light Buildings 1 2 1 +4 Personnel, +2 Otherwise yes#
Medium Buildings 2 4 1 +5 Personnel, +3 Otherwise yes#
Heavy Buildings 3 not allowed 1 +6 Personnel, +4 Otherwise yes#
Rubble 4 not allowed 2 +6 Personnel, +3 Otherwise no
Jungle 6 not allowed 2 +4 Personnel, +2 Otherwise yes
Dier (Depression) 2 4 1 +4 Personnel, +2 Otherwise yes
Good Road .5 .5 1 none & no
Poor Road 1 1 1 none & no
Smoke +1 +2 +1 Firing into or out of +3 yes
Wreck +0 +1 +0 +2 Personnel, +1 Otherwise no
Minefield +1* +1* +1* -2 no
Ditch +3 not allowed +1 none no#
Embankment +1 +3 +1 +3 Personnel, +1 Otherwise no#
Wall/Berm +3! not allowed +2 +4 Personnel, +2 Otherwise no#
Hedgerow +4$ not allowed +1 +4 Personnel, +2 Otherwise yes#
Stream +3 +8 +2 none no
Road Block +4@ not allowed +1 +2 Personnel, +1 Otherwise no#
Anti-Tank Ditch not allowed not allowed +2 +4 Personnel in ditch no
Barbed Wire +3 not allowed +2 -1 no
Ford +2 +6 +1 -1 if target in movement posture no
Hedge +0 +0 +1 +2 Personnel cohesion only no#
Wood Fence +0 +0 +1 +2 Personnel cohesion only no#
Up or Down Staircase not allowed not allowed +1 none no#
Track 1 1.5 1 none & no
ALL TERRAIN RESULTS ARE CUMULATIVE. & - Stands moving at the road or track rate do not gain the
* - Applies only when leaving the terrain defensive benefit of covering terrain through which such
stands pass. Stationary stands on roads/tracks or those
** - Applies only to fire coming through the ridge crest or paying the required movement costs of covering terrain do
from below the hilltop gain the defensive benefit.
# - Applies only to fire coming through the terrain feature. In
$ - See rule 11.5.1 (p.19)
order to be spotted, a unit in this terrain must have fired in
this phase or adjacent to a friendly stand. ! - See rule 11.5.2 (p.19)
@ - See rule 11.5.3 (p.19)

Range Effect on Range Effect Mine Attacks

Combat Die Rolls on infantry
Range in inches Die Roll Combat Die Rolls Table
Range in inches Die Roll CRT Column
1-2 Subtract 2 Minefield Type
1-2 Subtract 2 Used
3-4 Subtract 1
3-4 Subtract 1 Hasty -2
5 - 20 No Effect
5-9 No Effect Prepared +1
21 - 40 Add 1
41 - 60 Add 2 10 - 14 Add 1 Defensive +7

Each additional 20 inches Add 1 15 - 20 Add 2 Applies when stand leaves the minefield

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro Squad®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII

introductory scenario - early 1943

John Brooks (the Soviet player) and Larry Jones (the German player) are playing a
"Meeting Engagement" scenario from the "Eastern Front" in early 1943. The point
base is 1330 points and the players agree on a force cohesion level of 15 for the
Germans and 13 for the Soviets. Therefore, the German player receives 1330 points
and the Soviet player 1535 points.

© 2012 Sven Lugar

84

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 introductory scenario
Cohesion Level = 13 Cohesion Level = 15
soviets germans

Tank Company Panzer Company (-)

1st Platoon: 3 x T-34c 1st Platoon: 4 x PzIVH

2nd Platoon: 3 x T-34c 2nd Platoon: 4 x PzIIIL

3rd Platoon: 3 x T-34c 3rd Platoon: 3 x PzIIIL

1 x T-34c HQ (+0 GHQ) 1 x PzIVH HQ (+0 GHQ)

Submachine Company Armored Panzergrenadier Company (-)

1st Platoon: 3 x Submachine Gun Infantry 1st Platoon: 3 x P/G Infantry '43,
3 x SdKfz 251/1
2nd Platoon: 3 x Submachine Gun Infantry
2nd Platoon: 3 x P/G Infantry '43,
3rd Platoon: 3 x Submachine Gun Infantry 3 x SdKfz 251/1
1 x Infantry HQ
3rd Platoon: 2 x P/G Infantry '43,
Heavy Tank Company 3 x SdKfz 251/1
1st Platoon: 2 x KV-1c 1 x Infantry HQ,
1 x SdKfz 251/1
2nd Platoon: 2 x KV-1c
1 x KV-1c HQ Panzerjaeger Platoon
4 x StugIIIF
Recon Platoon (-)
3 x T-34c
2 x BA-64

Scenario Length - 10 turns initial deployment:

German units enter from the south edge.

Special Rules:
The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p. 24)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
Tank Marines! (Rule 12.8 - p. 24)
Soviet units enter the map from the north edge.
victory conditions:
Destroy 50% or more of the opposing stands while
losing less than 50% of your own stands.

terrain suggestions:
The map should be approximately 26"
(east to west) x 48" (north to south).
Terrain is mixed. Maximum sighting
distance is 40 inches.
10-30 percent of the playing surface
should be features.

85

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro SQUAD®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII
tamada’s charge - July 6, 1939
During the late spring and summer of 1939, Japanese
and Soviet forces fought an intense, undeclared war
along the Mongolian steppes that resulted in a
crushing defeat for the Japanese Kwantung Army. In
May, Mongolian cavalry crossed into the disputed
border region between Japanese-controlled Manchuria
and the Soviet client state of Mongolia near the Halha
River (or Khalkin Gol). Japanese maps showed the
border being defined by the Halha, while the
Soviets contended that the true border was several
miles farther east, near the Manchurian village
of Nomonhan.
After just two days of combat operations, both 3rd and
4th Tank Regiments had sustained heavy losses.
Their vulnerability was due to two main reasons.
86
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
First, Japanese armored units typically operated
without infantry support, making them easy prey for
Soviet anti-tank guns. Second, the Japanese tank guns
in both their medium and light tanks were outclassed
in range and penetration by Soviet BT-5s and T-26s
mounting a very efficient 45mm gun.
During the afternoon of June 6th, Soviet forces
belonging to the 36th Motorized Infantry Division
repeatedly attempted to outflank Colonel Tamada
Yoshio’s 3rd Tank Regiment. During one such attempt,
realizing the advancing Soviet force were attempting
to turn his regiment's flank, Colonel Tamada decided
to forestall the Soviet advance with the forces he had
on hand, two under strength tank companies and the
regimental headquarters unit.
© 2012 Sven Lugar
 tamada’s Charge
Cohesion = 13 Cohesion = 13
japanese soviets
ELEMENTS: 4TH TANK REGIMENT ELEMENTS: 36TH MOTORIZED INFANTRY
DIVISION
3rd Company (Setup Area 1)
1st Platoon: 3 x Type 95 Motorized Infantry Company
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry '39,
2nd Platoon: 2 x Type 95 3 x Light Truck
3rd Platoon: 2 x Type 95 2nd Platoon: 2 x Infantry '39,
Company HQ: 1 x Type 95 HQ 2 x Light Truck
3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry '39,
4th Company (Setup Area 2) 3 x Light Truck, 1 x MMG
1st Platoon: 3 x Type 89B
Company HQ: 1 x Infantry HQ,
2nd Platoon: 2 x Type 89B 1 x Light Truck
Company HQ: 1 x Type 89B HQ Motorized Infantry Company
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry '39,
Regimental Headquarters (Either Setup Area) 3 x Light Truck
2 x Type 95
1 x Type 95 (+1 GHQ) 2nd Platoon: 2 x Infantry '39,
2 x Light Truck
Artillery Battery (Off Board) 4 x 75mm Howitzer 3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry '39,
3 x Light Truck, 1 x MMG
Company HQ: 1 x Infantry HQ,
1 x Light Truck
Scenario Length - 15 turns
ATG Battery 4 x 45mm m1932
4 x Light Truck
Initial deployment: Tank Company
A. Japanese units are placed in their respective setup 1st Platoon: 3 x T-26 m1937
areas (see map).
2nd Platoon: 3 x T-26 m1937
B. Soviet units enter the map enter the map on game
Company HQ: 1 x T-26 m1937 HQ
turn 1 in the Soviet Entry Area (see map).
GHQ 1 x Infantry HQ (-1 GHQ)
C. The Japanese player must plot his off-board indirect
1 x Light Truck
artillery fire for game turns 1 through 15. (This must be
done before any Soviet units enter the map.)

D. If the Japanese decides to use the Fire Support terrain suggestions:

Allocation rule, he may place a maximum of eight The map should be approximately 46” (east to west) x
impact markers per turn, for a total of sixty (4 x 15) 36” (north to south). Terrain open. Maximum sighting
impact markers for the scenario. distance is 90 inches.

Special Rules: victory conditions:

The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p. 24)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
Fire Support Allocation (Rule 12.11 - p. 25)
The Soviet player wins if he exits at least 50% of his
stands off the eastern edge of the map. Any other result
is a Japanese victory.

87

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro SQUAD®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII
heart of stonne - may 15, 1940
In the early morning of May 15th, 1940, the By late morning, the French had amassed a counterat-
Grossdeutschland Regiment, supported by the 2nd tacking force consisting of the following formations: 3rd
Battalion, 8th Panzer Regiment advanced on Stonne and Company, 49th Tank Battalion equipped with Char-B1s,
seized it after heavy fighting. By 10:45, Stonne had 1st Company, 45th Tank Battalion equipped with
changed hands four times. Each time French tanks Hotchkiss H-39s, 2nd Company, 4th Tank Battalion with
pushed the Germans back. However, the French infantry FCM-36s, 1st Battalion, 67th Motorized Infantry
and armor were badly coordinated, enabling the Regiment, and 1st Battalion, 51st Motorized Infantry
Germans to repeatedly counterattack and retain Regiment. Once again, the attack was badly coordinated
possession of the town. and the Char-B1s of the 49th Tank Battalion attacked
without infantry support.

Stonne was defended by the 1st Battal-

ion of the Grossdeutschland Regiment
augmented by 37mm AT-guns of the
regiment's 14th Panzerjaeger Company.
In the last moment, three of the available
37mm anti-tank guns were repositioned
at the southwestern exit of Stonne. Three
of the massive Char-B1s were destroyed
by fire from these 37mm ATGs for the
loss of two of the defending guns. The
remaining tanks withdrew to the south.

A new counterattack was launched with

the elements of the 45th and 49th Tank
Battalions, reinforced by a section of
FCM-36 tanks from the 2nd Company,
4th Tank Battalion, and the infantry of
1st Battalion, 67th Motorized Infantry
Regiment. At 11:00, the attack started.
Despite the violence of the German
return fire, French tanks and infantry
forced their way into the village
through the gardens at the southern
edge of the town. Gradually, the
Germans withdrew, leaving the French
once again in possession of the town by
noon. Shortly thereafter, the French
armor withdrew from Stonne for a
planned counterattack on Sedan. This
enabled the Grossdeutschland
Regiment to launch yet another counter-
attack with the support of the 1st
Battalion, 69th Infantry Regiment that
took Stonne again at 17:30.

Scenario Length - 30 turns

© 2012 Sven Lugar

88

David Hicks (Order #16483250)


french
4TH COMPANY, 45TH TANK
BATTALION, 3RD DCR
DIVISION
1st Platoon: 3 x H-39
2nd Platoon: 3 x H-39
3rd Platoon: 2 x H-39
4th Platoon: 3 x H-39
Company HQ: 1 x H-39 HQ
3RD COMPANY, 49TH TANK
BATTALION, 3RD DCR
DIVISION
1st Platoon: 3 x Char BI
2nd Platoon: 3 x Char BI
3rd Platoon: 2 x Char BI
Co. HQ: 1 x 3 x Char BI HQ
1ST BATTALION, 67TH
INFANTRY BATTALION, 3RD
DIM DIVISION
1st Company
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry
3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry
1 x 60mm
Mortar (1)
1 x Inf. HQ/FO
2nd Company
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry
3rd Platoon: 3 x Infantry
1 x 60mm
Mortar (1)
1 x Inf. HQ/FO
3rd Company
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry
3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry
1 x 60mm
Mortar (1)
1 x Inf. HQ/FO
terrain: The map should be approximately 24" (East
to West) x 48" (North to South).
Terrain is mixed.
Maximum sighting distance is 40 inches.
10-30 percent of the playing surface should be features.
heart of stonne
Cohesion = 13
Heavy Weapons Company
Mortar Platoon: 1 x 81mm
Mortar (2)
MG Platoon: 2 x MMG
MG Platoon: 2 x MMG
MG Platoon: 2 x MMG
1 x Inf. HQ/FO
Battalion HQ
1 x Infantry HQ/FO (+1 GHQ)
2 COMPANY, 4
ND TH
BATTALION
1st Platoon: 3 x FCM-36
2nd Platoon: 3 x FCM-36
3rd Platoon: 3 x FCM-36
4th Platoon: 2 x FCM-36
Co. HQ 1x FCM-36 HQ
3 additional Forward Observers
may be assigned to any stand of
the player's choice.
GROUP 1 consists of the
4th Co., 45th Tank Bttn. &
3rd Co., 49th Tank Bttn.,
3rd DCR Division.
GROUP 2 consists of the
1st Bttn., 67th Infantry Regt.,
3rd DIM Division and 2nd Co.,
4th Bttn., 3rd DIM Division
2 BATTERIES, 42ND FIELD
ARTILLERY BATTALION
(Off Board)
8 x 75mm Howitzer - 15 fire
missions each
german Cohesion = 15
2ND BATTALION, GROSS-
Mortar Platoon: 1 x 81mm
DEUTSCHLAND Mortar (2)
REGIMENT Battalion HQ
1st Company 1 x Infantry HQ (+0 GHQ)/FO
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry 13TH LIGHT GUN
3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry COMPANY, GROSS-
1 x 50mm DEUTSCHLAND
Mortar (1) REGIMENT
2nd Company 3 x 75mm Infantry Gun
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry
14TH PANZERJAEGER
2nd Platoon: 2 x Infantry
3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry COMPANY, GROSS-
DEUTSCHLAND
1 x 50mm
Mortar (1) REGIMENT
8 x 37mm ATG
1 x Infantry
HQ/FO
4TH COMPANY, 43RD STURM
3rd Company PIONEER BATTALION
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry 1st Platoon: 3 x Engineer
2nd Platoon: 2 x Infantry 2nd Platoon: 3 x Engineer
3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry 3rd Platoon: 2 x Engineer
1 x 50mm 1 x Infantry
Mortar (1) HQ/FO
4th Company 2 additional forward observers
MG Platoon: 2 x MMG
may be assigned to any stand
MG Platoon: 1 x MMG of the player's choice.
Initial deployment:
A. The German Player deploys first. All German units, except
for the off board artillery units, are placed on the table on or
north of their setup areas (see sketch map)
B. The French player deploys next. All French, except for the off
board artillery units, are placed on the table on or south of their
setup areas (see sketch map)
C. The German. player must plot all indirect artillery fire for
game turns 1 - 6. (This must be done before any French units
are placed on the map.)
D. The French player must plot his off-board indirect artillery
fire for game turns 1 - 30. (This must be done before any
German units are placed on the map.)

optional Rules: victory conditions:

The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p.24)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
The Communications Breakdown! (Rule 12.5 - p.24)
Fire Support Allocation (Rule 12.11 - p.25)
French Victory: Occupy Stonne with at least twelve (12) or
more stands by the end of turn 15. Suppressed and/or
Disorganized stands may be used to fill this requirement.
German Victory: Eliminate 20 or more French stands before
the French player achieves his victory conditions.

89

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro SQUAD®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII
easter break-in april 14, 1941

On February 14th, 1941, Erwin Rommel arrived in Tripoli to take command of the newly formed
Deutsches Afrika Korps. Exhausted by the frantic pace of the 1940 campaign and stripped of many of
their best troops by the demands of the Greek campaign, the British army in North Africa was ripe for
the arrival of the Afrika Korps and its ruthlessly ambitious commander. Rommel correctly surmised
that the British should not be allowed to recover their strength and make good their serious equipment
losses incurred by their long and arduous race across the desert to trap and destroy the Italians. He
took the small but confident force he assembled at El Agheila and hurled it at the strung out and
exhausted British force.

The thinly stretched British positions in Libya quickly crumbled under Rommel's onslaught. In less
than a month, the Germans had driven British forces back to the Egyptian frontier and surrounded
Tobruk, laying siege to the port fortress occupied by the Australian 7th Infantry Division and
supporting elements of the Western Desert Force. Now Rommel would make his first attempt at
storming Tobruk on Easter morning, April 14, 1941.

© 2012 Sven Lugar

90

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 easter break-in
Cohesion = 16 Cohesion = 17
British German
Break Point = 83 Break Point = 100

Elements, 1st Royal Horse Artillery (Area 1)

1st Battery: 4 x 25-lbr/Lt. Improved Position 1st Battalion, 5th Panzer Regiment
1st Company: 5 x PzIIIIH, 2 x PzII
2nd Battery: 4 x 25-lbr/Lt. Improved Position
2nd Company: 3 x PzIIIIH, 3 x PzII
Squadron HQ: 1 x Inf. HQ (+0 GHQ)/ Medium
Improved Position 3rd Company: 6 x PzIVF1

Battalion HQ: 1 x PzIIIH HQ

Elements, 2/3 Australian A/T Regiment (Area 2)
1st Battery: 4 x 2-lbr ATG/Light Improved 2nd Battalion, 5th Panzer Regiment
Position 1st Company: 4 x PzIIIIH, 1 x PzII
2nd Battery: 4 x 2-lbr ATG/Light Improved 2nd Company: 4 x PzIIIIH, 2 x PzII
Position
3rd Company: 5 x PzIVF1
Battery M, 3rd Royal Horse Artillery
Battalion HQ: 1 x PzIIIH HQ
(AREA 3 on turn 1 or after)
1st Troop: 5 x 2-lbr Portee
Headquarters, 5th Panzer Regiment
1 x PzIIIH HQ (+1 GHQ)
Squadron C, 1st Royal Tank Regiment
(AREA 4 on turn 5 or after) Elements, 605th Panzerjaeger Battalion
1st Troop: 4 x Vickers MkVI 3 x Panzerjaeger I
2nd Troop: 3 x Vickers MkVI

3rd Troop: 4 x A9 Cruiser

Squadron HQ: 1 x A9 Cruiser HQ
Initial deployment:
A. All German stands enter map anywhere along the
south edge of the board on game turn 1.
B. All British stands belonging to the 1st Royal Horse
Artillery and 2/3 Australian A/T Regiment are placed
on the table in their setup areas (see sketch map).
optional Rules:
Unit Determination (Rule 12.1 - p.22)
The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p.24)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
British 25-lbrs were not supplied with armor
piercing shot during this engagement. Therefore,
they may only fire as "artillery" weapons using the
artillery rules.

C. All British stands belonging to the 3rd Royal Horse
Artillery may enter the map on game turn 1 or after
(see sketch map).
D. All British stands belonging to the Squadron C, 1at
Royal Tank Regiment may enter the map on game
turn 5 or after (see sketch map).
Scenario Length - 20 turns
victory conditions:
The German player must exit any 12 stands off the
North edge of the map before he reaches his break
point. Any other result is a British victory.
terrain:
The map should be approximately 46" (east to west) x 52"
(north to south)
Terrain is open. Maximum sighting distance is 90 inches.

91

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro SQuad®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII
bir el gubi - november 19, 1941
The British 7th Armored Division commenced
Operation Crusader in the early hours of November 19,
1941, advancing northwestwards towards Bir el Gubi
and attempting to turn Rommel's southern flank.
Occupying positions around Bir el Gubi was the Italian
Ariete Armored Division. The first British unit to make
contact was the 22nd Armored Brigade, which chased a
company of M13/40 tanks back into the Italian prepared
positions without adequate reconnaissance or artillery
support. Little hindered by British artillery, Italian anti-
tank guns and artillery tore into the Crusaders of the 3rd
County of London Yeomenry (3CLY) and 2nd Royal
Gloucestershire Hussars (2RGH).
© 2012 Sven Lugar
92
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
By early afternoon the 22nd Armored Brigade had
captured the extreme left of the Italian position and both
3CLY and 2RGH regrouped to continue the advance. By
this time, the Ariete's division VII and VIII Tank
Battalions, supported by Gruppo Milmart's powerful
102mm truck- mounted guns, had advanced to meet the
British onslaught. The British regiment's enthusiasm
was no match for the battle experience of the Italians.
The British were forced back, losing more than fifty
tanks while Italian losses were somewhat less. Even
more importantly, the 22nd Armored Brigade was out of
action for several days afterward. This would not be the
last time the Italians saved Rommel's bacon.
 bir el gubi - Scenario 1
British Cohesion = 13 italians Cohesion = 14

ELEMENTS, 3RD CLY, 22ND ARMORED BRIGADE III/8TH BERSAGLIERI BATTALION, ARIETE
1st Squadron DIVISION
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I 1st Company
2nd Troop: 3 x Crusader I 1st Platoon: 3 x Bersaglieri Infantry
3rd Troop: 2 x Crusader I 2nd Platoon: 3 x Bersaglieri Infantry
4th Troop: 2 x Crusader I 3rd Platoon: 3 x Bersaglieri Infantry
Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I (HQ), 1 x MMG
2 x Crusader I C/S Company HQ: 1 x Infantry HQ
10 x Light Improved Positions
2nd Squadron
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I 2nd Company
2nd Troop: 3 x Crusader I 1st Platoon: 3 x Bersaglieri Infantry
3rd Troop: 3 x Crusader I 2nd Platoon: 2 x Bersaglieri Infantry
4th Troop: 2 x Crusader I 3rd Platoon: 2 x Bersaglieri Infantry
1 x MMG
Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I (HQ),
1 x Crusader I C/S Company HQ: 1 x Infantry HQ
9 x Light Improved Positions
Regimental Headquarters
1 x Crusader I (+0 GHQ) Anti-Tank Company
1st Platoon: 4 x 47mm ATG
ELEMENTS, 2ND RGH, 22ND ARMORED BRIGADE 2nd Platoon: 2 x 47mm ATG
1st Squadron
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I Anti-Aircraft Platoon
2 x 20mm AAG
2nd Troop: 3 x Crusader I
3rd Troop: 2 x Crusader I
Battalion Headquarters
Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I (HQ), 1 x Bersaglieri Infantry
1 x Crusader I C/S
Battalion HQ: 1 x Infantry HQ (+1 GHQ)
2 x Light Improved Positions

Scenario Length - 20 turns ELEMENTS, 132ND ARTILLERY REGIMENT, ARIETE

DIVISION
4 x 75/27 Gun
optional Rules: 4 x Light Improved Positions
The Hot Shot (Rule 12.2 - p.24)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)

Initial deployment: victory conditions:

A. All British units enter the map anywhere along the
south edge of the board on turn 1.
B. All Italian units are placed north of the Italian
Setup Line (see sketch map).
terrain: The map should be approximately 48"
(north to south) x 32" (east to west)
British Victory: Exit at least twelve (12) or more stands
off the north edge of the map by the end of turn 20.
Suppressed and/or Disorganized stands may be used to
fulfill this requirement.
Italian Victory: Eliminate 16 or more British stands
before the British player achieves his victory conditions.

Terrain is open. Maximum sighting distance is

120 inches.

93

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 bir el gubi - Scenario 2
British Cohesion = 13 italians Cohesion = 13

ELEMENTS, 3RD CLY, 22ND ARMORED BRIGADE ELEMENTS, VII TANK BATTALION, 132ND TANK
1st Squadron REGIMENT, ARIETE DIVISION
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I 1st Company
2nd Troop: 3 x Crusader I 1st Platoon: 5 x M13/40
3rd Troop: 2 x Crusader I 2nd Platoon: 4 x M13/40
Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I (HQ), Company HQ: 1 x M13/40 (HQ)
1 x Crusader I C/S
2nd Company
2nd Squadron 1st Platoon: 4 x M13/40
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I 2nd Platoon: 4 x M13/40
2nd Troop: 2 x Crusader I Company HQ: 1 x M13/40 (HQ)
3rd Troop: 2 x Crusader I
4th Troop: 2 x Crusader I Battalion Headquarters
1 x M13/40 (+1 GHQ)
Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I (HQ),
2 x Crusader I C/S
ELEMENTS, VIII TANK BATTALION, 132ND TANK
REGIMENT, ARIETE DIVISION
ELEMENTS, 2ND RGH, 22ND ARMORED BRIGADE
1st Company
1st Squadron
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I 1st Platoon: 5 x M13/40
2nd Troop: 2 x Crusader I 2nd Platoon: 5 x M13/40
3rd Troop: 2 x Crusader I Company HQ: 1 x M13/40 (HQ)
Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I (HQ)
2nd Company
2nd Squadron 1st Platoon: 4 x M13/40
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I 2nd Platoon: 4 x M13/40
2nd Troop: 3 x Crusader I Company HQ: 1 x M13/40 (HQ)
3rd Troop: 3 x Crusader I
1st Battery, Gruppo Milmart
4th Troop: 2 x Crusader I 4 x 102/35 Portee
Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I (HQ),
1 x Crusader I C/S

Regimental Headquarters optional Rules:

1 x Crusader I (+0 GHQ)
The Hot Shot (Rule 12.2 - p.24)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)

Scenario Length - 15 turns

Initial deployment:
A. All British units enter the map anywhere along the
south edge of the board on turn 1.
B. All Italian units enter the map anywhere along the
north edge of the board on turn 1.
victory conditions:
Destroy 50% or more of the opposing stands while
losing less than 50% of your own stands.
terrain: The map should be approximately
48" (north to south) x 40" (east to west)
Terrain is open. Maximum sighting distance is
120 inches.

94

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro squad®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII
Knightsbridge - june 12, 1942
In the afternoon of the June 11th General Messervy,
commander of the 7th Armored Division, received
intelligence that that the German 21st Panzer Division
was engaged around the Knightsbridge box and the
15th Panzer Division was over 20km to the southeast
advancing on the El Adem positions. With two
freshly rearmed and supplied armored brigades at
his disposal, the 2nd and 4th, he planned to exploit
this gap between the German Divisions. Accordingly,
he ordered the tank brigades to assemble south of the
small village of Bir Lefa and prepare to assault the
15th Panzers in the morning. If all went well the 15th
would be routed. Then, the armored brigades could
swing northwest and attack the rear of the 21st in
conjunction with the 1st Armored Division advancing
from the north.
© 2012 Sven Lugar
95
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Unknown to British command, however, the German
wireless intercept service had reported the planned
attack to Rommel almost as soon as Messervy had
radioed his orders to his brigades. Thus forewarned,
Rommel ordered the 21st to disengage from
Knightsbridge and move east during the night while
the 15th prepared to meet the coming attack. The
morning found both of the British brigades sitting
motionless awaiting final orders from Messervy that
would never come. The general was hiding in a small
wadi surrounded by elements of 90th light moving on
El Adem. Rommel ordered both panzer divisions to
attack, the 15th from the south and the 21st from the
west. The outcome of this battle would decide the fate
of the Gazala Line and Tobruk.
 Knightsbridge

British Cohesion = 13 german Cohesion = 15

ELEMENTS, 4TH ARMORED BRIGADE ELEMENTS, 15TH PANZER DIVISION

1st Platoon: 3 x PzIIIIJ
Heavy Cruiser Squadron (Area 1) 2nd Platoon: 2 x PzIIIH
1st Troop: 3 x M3 Grant
3rd Platoon: 2 x PzIVF1
2nd Troop: 3 x M3 Grant
Company HQ: 1 x PzIIIH HQ (+0 GHQ)
3rd Troop: 2 x M3 Grant
Squadron HQ: 1 x M3 Grant HQ, Heavy Flak Platoon (-)
1 x M3 Grant 1 x 88mm Flak36,
1 x Heavy Tractor
Cruiser Squadron (Area 2)
1st Troop: 4 x M3 Stuart ELEMENTS, 21ST PANZER DIVISION
2nd Troop: 3 x M3 Stuart 1st Platoon: 3 x PzIIIIJ

3rd Troop: 3 x M3 Stuart 2nd Platoon: 3 x PzIIIH

Squadron HQ: 1 x M3 Stuart HQ (+0 GHQ) 3rd Platoon: 2 x PzIVF1

Company HQ: 1 x PzIIIJ HQ
Cruiser Squadron (Area 3)
1st Troop: 3 x Crusader I Panzerjaeger Platoon (-)
2nd Troop: 3 x Crusader I 3 x Marder II (76mm)

Squadron HQ: 1 x Crusader I HQ Anti-Tank Gun Platoon (-)

2 x 50mm Pak 38 ATG,
2 x Light Truck
Scenario Length - 15 turns

optional Rules: terrain: The map should be approximately 46"

The Hot Shot (Rule 12.2 - p.24) (east to west) x 36" (north to south)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24) Terrain is open. Maximum sighting distance is 90”.
I Got’em In My Sights! (Rule 12.13 - p.26)

Initial deployment:
A. German units belonging to the 15th Panzer
Division enter map anywhere along the south edge of
the board on game turn 1.

B. German units belonging to the 21st Panzer Division

enter map anywhere along the west edge of the board
on game turn 1.

C. All British are placed on the table in their setup

areas (see sketch map).

victory conditions:
Destroy 50% or more of the opposing stands while
losing less than 50% of your own stands.

96

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro squad®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII

edson’s ridge - september 13, 1942

Edson's Ridge depicts a critical portion of the Japanese attack on elements of the U.S. 1st Marine
Division south of Henderson Field on Guadacanal. In the early morning hours of September 13th,
the Kawaguchi Brigade repeatedly assaulted the Marine 1st Raider and Parachute battalions
positioned near a grassy ridge overlooking Henderson Field. The ferocious Japanese attack,
preceded by a naval bombardment and supported by Japanese regimental artillery and mortars,
came close to rupturing the American lines.

© 2012 Sven Lugar

Initial deployment:
A. The U.S. Player deploys first. All U.S. units, C. The U.S. player must plot all indirect artillery
except for the off board artillery units, are placed fire for game turns 1 through 3. (This must be done
on the table on or north of their set-up areas (see before any Japanese units are placed on the map.)
sketch map). The U.S. GHQ may be placed
anywhere north of the U.S. set-up areas. D. The Japanese player must plot his off-board
indirect artillery fire for game turns 1 through 15.
B. The Japanese player deploys next. All Japanese (This must be done before any U.S. units are placed
units, except for the off board artillery units, are on the map.)
placed on the table on or south of their set-up areas
(see sketch map). The Japanese GHQ may be placed
anywhere south of the Japanese set-up areas.

97

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 edson’s ridge
u.s. forces Cohesion = 12 japanese forces Cohesion = 12

COMPANY B, 1ST MARINE RAIDER BATTALION 5TH COMPANY, 2ND BATTALION, 4TH INFANTRY
1st Platoon: 2 x Marine '42 REGIMENT
2nd Platoon: 3 x Marine '42 1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
3rd Platoon: 2 x Marine '42
3rd Platoon: 3 x Infantry, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
Weapons Platoon: 1 x MMG, 1 x 60mm Mortar (2)
Weapons Platoon: 1 x MMG, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
1 x Marine HQ/FO
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any 1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand
stand of the player's choice. of the player's choice.

COMPANY B, 1ST MARINE PARACHUTE BATTALION 7TH COMPANY, 2ND BATTALION, 4TH INFANTRY REGIMENT
1st Platoon: 2 x Marine '42 1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
2nd Platoon: 3 x Marine '42 2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
3rd Platoon: 2 x Marine '42 3rd Platoon: 3 x Infantry, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
Weapons Platoon: 1 x MMG, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
1 x 60mm Mortar (2),
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
1 x Marine HQ/FO
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any of the player's choice.
stand of the player's choice.
2ND BATTALION MACHINE GUN COMPANY
COMPANY C, 1 MARINE PARACHUTE BATTALION
ST 4 x MMG
1st Platoon: 2 x Marine '42
ELEMENTS, 1ST BATTALION, 124TH INFANTRY REGIMENT
2nd Platoon: 2 x Marine '42
9 x Infantry
3rd Platoon: 1 x Marine '42 3 x 50mm Mortar (3)
1 x 60mm Mortar (2)
5 x MMG
1 "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand of the 1 x Infantry HQ/FO
player's choice. 1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand
of the player's choice.
GENERAL HEADQUARTERS
1 x Marine HQ (+0 GHQ)/FO GENERAL HEADQUARTERS
1 x Infantry HQ (+1 GHQ)/FO
2 BATTERIES, 5TH BATTALION, 11TH MARINE ARTILLERY
REGIMENT (Off Board) 2ND BATTALION GUN PLATOON (Off Board)
8 x 105mm Howitzer - 5 fire missions each 2 x 70mm Howitzer

1/124 BATTALION GUN PLATOON (Off Board)

2 x 70mm Howitzer
Scenario Length - 20 turns
20TH MOUNTAIN GUN REGIMENT (Off Board)
8 x 75mm Howitzer
optional Rules:
The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p.24) 124TH INFANTRY REGIMENT MORTAR COMPANY
(Off Board) 4 x 81mm Mortar (2)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
The Communications Breakdown! (Rule 12.5 - p.24)

This battle occurred during the early morning hours of

September 13th. Therefore, sighting distance is limited to
150 yards (6 inches). Movement allowances are halved,
round down any fractions. Machine Gun Area Fire (Rule
7.5 - p.6) is limited to 6 inches as well.
terrain: The map should be approximately 24" (east
to west) x 24" (north to south)
victory conditions:
Japanese Victory: Exit at least twelve (12) or more stands
off the north edge of the map by the end of turn 15.
Suppressed and/or Disorganized stands may be used to
fulfill this requirement.
American Victory: Eliminate 20 or more Japanese stands
before the Japanese player achieves his victory
conditions.

98

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro squad®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII
Kampfgruppe Stachwitz - July 10, 1943

By the sixth day of the Kursk offensive, German mechanized forces had still not obtained operational freedom
of movement into the Soviet rear areas. There were several reasons for the lack of a German breakthrough.
First was the incredibly dense and deep field fortifications built by the Soviets in anticipation of the Kursk
offensive. Second, Soviet counterattacks along the flanks of German penetrations drew off much of the mobile
striking power of the panzer divisions since the attacking German forces lacked regular infantry formations
to guard the flanks of the advance.

On 10 July, 1943 the German 47th Panzer Corps was still steadily advancing north towards the town of
Oboyan. In the lead was the Grossdeutschland Panzer Division. Once again, a Soviet counterattack hit the left
flank of the 47th Panzer Corps, forcing the Grossdeutschland's commander to divert a powerful armored force
to deal with it: Kampfgruppe Stachwitz.

© 2012 Sven Lugar

99

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 kampfgruppe stachwitz
german forces Cohesion = 16 soviet forces Cohesion = 13

KAMPFGRUPPE STACHWITZ, 200TH TANK BRIGADE, 6TH TANK CORPS

GROSSDEUTCSHLAND DIVISION
1st Battalion
1st Company (Setup Area 1) 1st Company: 8 x T-34,
1st Platoon: 3 x PzV (Panther) 1 x T-34 HQ
2nd Platoon: 2 x PzV (Panther) 2nd Company: 9 x T-34,
1 x T-34 HQ
Company HQ: 1 x PzV (Panther) HQ
Battalion HQ: 1 x T-34 (+0 GHQ)
2nd Company (Setup Area 2)
1st Platoon: 3 x PzIV H 1st Battalion
1st Company: 7 x M3 Grant,
2nd Platoon: 3 x PzIV H
1 x M3 Grant HQ
3rd Platoon: 3 x PzIV H
2nd Company: 6 x M3 Grant,
Company HQ: 1 x PzIV H HQ 1 x M3 Grant HQ
Battalion HQ: M3 Grant (+0 GHQ)
Heavy Panzer Platoon (Either Setup Area)
4 x PzVI A (Tiger I)

Kampfgruppe Headquarters (Either Setup Area)

1 x PzIV H (+1 GHQ)
terrain:
The map should be approximately 52" (east to west) x
48" (north to south)
Scenario Length - 15 turns Terrain is open. Maximum sighting distance is 80 inches.

optional Rules:
The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p.24)
Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
I Got'em In My Sights! (Rule 12.13 - p.26)
victory conditions:
The Soviet player wins if he exits at least 50% of his
stands off the eastern edge of the map. Any other result
is a German victory.

Initial deployment:
A. German units are placed in their respective setup areas (see map).

B. Soviet units enter the map enter the map on game turn 1 in the Soviet Entry Area (see map).

100

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro sQUAD®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII
tobacco factory - september 12, 1943
On September 9th of 1943, a combined British/American
army invaded the Italian mainland. The Allied leaders had
hoped that the General Mark Clark's 5th Army landing
near the port town of Salerno, combined with a drive up
the southern Italian coastline by the British 8th Army,
would compel all German forces to leave southern Italy.
One of the key obstacles to the American advance was
circular array of large concrete buildings, the Persano
Tobacco Factory, which dominated the surrounding
terrain and a major route inland, the Eboli road.
The first assault against the Factory took place on the
afternoon of September 11th. Two battalions of infantry
from the 157th Regimental Combat Team, supported by
tanks and artillery, ran up against stiff opposition from
panzergrenadiers of the 16th Panzer Division. Intense anti-
tank, mortar, and machine gun fire drove the U.S. forces
back, inflicting heavy casualties.
During the second assault against the Factory the next day,
assault guns of the 191st Tank Battalion shelled the farm
north of the Factory itself, while a company of tanks put
180 rounds into the Factory. After a fight of more than an
hour and a half the enemy withdrew up the Eboli road,
Company B held the Factory at 1130.
A German counterattack followed very quickly. At 1305
eight enemy tanks and a battalion of panzergrenadiers
attacked down the Eboli road. Howitzers of the 158th Field
Artillery Battalion stopped the attack momentarily, but by
1340 the 1st Battalion, 157th Infantry, had been forced out of
the Factory. Fire from the 158th and 189th Field Artillery
Battalions, supported by three
naval gunfire missions, checked
the enemy at 1500. The German
force retreated back to the
safety of the Factory.

Late in the afternoon of

12 September U.S. troops
moved up again under a
smoke screen fired by
Company C, 2d Chemical
Battalion. Companies A and C,
191st Tank Battalion,
spearheaded the advance
toward the Factory at 1700.
After clearing the Factory
grounds, the tanks pushed on
into the woods at the northeast
end of the Tobacco Factory and
withdrew at 1830. They left the
1st Battalion, 157th Infantry, in
command of the area from the
Factory to the road junction in
the Grataglia.

© 2012 Scenario Length -

Sven Lugar
25 turns

terrain: The map should be approximately 48" (north to optional Rules:

south) x 38" (east to west) The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p.24)
Terrain is mixed. Maximum sighting distance is 40 inches. Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
Fire Support Allocation (Rule 12.11 - p.25)
101

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 tobacco factory
U.S. forces Cohesion = 16 german forces Cohesion = 17

ELEMENTS, 45TH INFANTRY DIVISION 1st BATTALION, 79th PANZERGRENADIER REGIMENT,

16TH PANZER DIVISION
COMPANY A, 191st Tank Battalion
1st Platoon: 4 x M4 Sherman 1ST COMPANY
2nd Platoon: 4 x M4 Sherman 1st Platoon: 3 x Panzergrenadier '43
3rd Platoon: 4 x M4 Sherman 2nd Platoon: 2 x Panzergrenadier '43
1 x M4 Sherman HQ/FO 3rd Platoon: 2 x Panzergrenadier '43
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand Support Platoon: 1 x MMG,
of the player's choice 1 x 81mm Stummel Mortar (2)
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
COMPANY C, 191st Tank Battalion
1st Platoon: 4 x M4 Sherman 2ND COMPANY
2nd Platoon: 4 x M4 Sherman 1st Platoon: 3 x Panzergrenadier '43
3rd Platoon: 4 x M4 Sherman 2nd Platoon: 3 x Panzergrenadier '43
1 x M4 Sherman HQ/FO 3rd Platoon: 2 x Panzergrenadier '43
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand Support Platoon: 1 x MMG,
of the player's choice 1 x 81mm Stummel Mortar (2)
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
BATTALION HEADQUARTERS, 191st Tank Battalion 3RD COMPANY
1 x M4 Sherman HQ/FO (+1 GHQ) 1st Platoon: 2 x Panzergrenadier '43
1 x M4 Sherman 2nd Platoon: 2 x Panzergrenadier '43
COMPANY A, 1/157th Infantry Regiment 3rd Platoon: 3 x Panzergrenadier '43
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry '43 Support Platoon: 2 x MMG,
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry '43 1 x 81mm Stummel Mortar (2)
3rd Platoon: 3 x Infantry '43 1 x Infantry HQ/FO
Heavy Weapon Platoon: 1 x 60mm Mortar (3), 1 x MMG SUPPORT COMPANY
1 x Infantry HQ/FO 4 x 120mm Mortar (Off Board)
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand - 10 fire missions each
of the player's choice - 40 shots total
- a maximum of 4 shots per turn
COMPANY B, 1/157th Infantry Regiment
3 x MMG
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry '43
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry '43 HEAVY COMPANY
3rd Platoon: 3 x Infantry '43 3 x 75mm Pak40 ATG
Heavy Weapon Platoon: 1 x 60mm Mortar (3), 1 x MMG 3 x Panzergrenadier '43 Engineer
1 x Infantry HQ/FO 1 x Infantry HQ/FO
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to any stand BATTALION HQ
of the player's choice 1 x Infantry HQ/FO (+0 GHQ)
HEAVY WEAPONS COMPANY, 1/157th Infantry Regiment Elements, Panzerjaeger Company, 79th Panzergrenadier
3 x 81mm Mortar (2) (Off Board) Regiment
3 x MMG 3 x MarderII 75mm

COMPANY C, 2nd Chemical Battalion (Off Board) Elements, 2nd Panzer Regiment, 16th Panzer Division
12 x 4.2" Mortar- 12 fire missions each - 144 shots total - 4 x Mk IVF2
a maximum of 12 shots per turn

Initial deployment: victory conditions:

A. German units enter are placed on the table anywhere 4 inches north U.S. Victory: Clear all Tobacco Factory
of the U.S setup line (see map). buildings of German stands by the end
of the scenario.
B. The German player must plot all indirect artillery fire for game turns 1 - 8.
This must be done before any U.S. units are placed on the map. German Victory: Avoid a U.S. victory.
C. All U.S. units are placed south of the U.S. setup line, (see map).

D. The U.S player must plot all indirect artillery fire for game turns 1 - 4.
This must be done before any German units are placed on the map.

102

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 Micro squad®: The 1:1 scale Game - WWII

nungshigum hill - april 13, 1944

The Japanese Imphal offensive into the Indian state of
Assam had two objectives. Not only would the
Japanese 15th Army obtain better defensive positions,
but also disrupt the expected British counter-
offensive expected sometime in 1944. This would be
accomplished by capturing the forward supply bases
at Imphal and Dimapur and the strategic mountain
passes in the Indian state of Assam, bordering
western Burma.
During the second week of April, units of the Japanese
51st Regiment established positions atop of
Nungshigum Hill, 3800 foot high and overlooking
Imphal, only six miles to the southwest.
© 2012 Sven Lugar
If the Japanese were allowed to remain in possession
of Nungshigum Hill, it could be used as a springboard
to assault Imphal and the all-important airfields sup-
plying Slim's 14th Army.
An attack by the 5th Indian Division's 3/9 Jats
managed to evict the Japanese, but were themselves
thrown off the hill by a fierce Japanese counterattack.
On the morning of April 13th, two companies of the
1/17 Dogra Regiment, an elite unit of the 5th Indian
Division, supported by six M3 Grants from the 3rd
Carbiniers, ascended Nungshigum Hill to eliminate
the Japanese threat once and for all.

103

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 nungshigum hill
commonwealth forces Cohesion = 17 japanese forces Cohesion = 15

ELEMENTS, 15TH INFANTRY DIVISION

ELEMENTS, 5TH INDIAN INFANTRY DIVISION
1st Company, 3rd Battalion, 51st Infantry Regiment
1. Western Force
1st Platoon: 2 x Infantry
Company A, 1/17 Dogra Regiment
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry '39
3rd Platoon: 1 x Infantry
2nd Platoon: 2 x Infantry '39
Weapons Platoon: 1 x MMG, 1 x 50mm Mortar (2)
3rd Platoon: 3 x Infantry '39
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
1 x 2" Mortar (3)
9 x Light Improved Positions
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to 2nd Company, 3rd Battalion, 51st Infantry Regiment
any stand of the player's choice. 1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry
2nd Platoon: 2 x Infantry
No. 5 Troop, 3rd Carbiniers
Weapons Platoon: 1 x MMG, 1 x 50mm Mortar (2)
3 x M3 Grant
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
2. Eastern Force 7 x Light Improved Positions
Company B, 1/17 Dogra Regiment
3rd Company, 3rd Battalion, 51st Infantry Regiment
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry '39
1st Platoon: 3 x Infantry
2nd Platoon: 3 x Infantry '39
2nd Platoon: 2 x Infantry
3rd Platoon: 2 x Infantry '39
Weapons Platoon: 1 x MMG, 1 x 50mm Mortar (3)
1 x 2" Mortar (3)
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
1 x Infantry HQ/FO
7 x Light Improved Positions
1 additional "Forward Observer" may be assigned to
any stand of the player's choice. 3rd Battalion Machine Gun Company
3 x MMG
No.4 Troop, 3rd Carbiniers
3 x Medium Improved Positions
3 x M3 Grant
General Headquarters
General Headquarters
1 x Infantry HQ (+1 GHQ)/FO 1 x Infantry HQ (+0 GHQ)/FO
1 x 70mm Howitzer
Elements, 28th Jungle Field Regiment, RA (Off Board) 2 x Medium Improved Positions
8 x 3.7" Mountain Howitzer - 10 fire missions each -
80 shots total - a maximum of 12 shots per turn
optional Rules:
Elements, 4th Field Regiment, RA (Off Board)
The Hot Shot! (Rule 12.2 - p.24)
4 x 25 -lbr- 10 fire missions each - 40 shots total -
a maximum of 16 shots per turn Intuitive Action (Rule 12.3 - p.24)
The Communications Breakdown! (Rule 12.5 - p.24)
Fire Support Allocation (Rule 12.11 - p.25)
Scenario Length - 20 turns

Initial deployment:
A. The Japanese player deploys first. All Japanese units
are placed on the table on or north of their setup areas
(see map).
victory conditions:
Commonwealth Victory: Eliminate all Japanese stands
before the end of game turn 20.
Japanese Victory: Avoid a Commonwealth victory.

B. The Commonwealth player enters his units on the

southern edge of the table on game turn 1 per the sketch
map.
C. The Commonwealth player must plot all indirect
artillery fire for game turns 1 - 6. This must be done
before any Japanese units are placed on the map.
terrain: The map should be approximately 42" (east to
west) x 36" (north to south)
Terrain is mixed. Maximum sighting distance is 40 inches.
The entire map is all steep slope. Units moving in a northerly
direction pay the movement costs for steep slopes.

104

David Hicks (Order #16483250)

 HISTORICAL PHOTOGRAPH CREDITS
Front Cover (upper left): Morton. Veteran Artillery men of the `C' Battery, 90th
Field Artillery, lay down a murderous barrage on troublesome Jap artillery positions
in Balete Pass, Luzon, P.I. April 19, 1945. U.S. National Archives and Records
Administration. Washington D.C. National Archives. Web. April 20, 2012
Front Cover (lower left): U.S. Army Signal Corps. Anti-aircraft Bofors gun dug
in at a position on a mound overlooking the beach in Algeria with a U.S. anti-aircraft
artillery crew in position. 1943. Library of Congress. Web. June 1, 2010
Front Cover (lower middle): Rothenberger, W.J. Two anti-tank infantrymen of
the 101st Infantry Regiment, dash past a blazing German gasoline trailer in square
of Kronach, Germany. April 14, 1945. U.S. National Archives and Records
Administration. Washington D.C. National Archives. Web. April 20, 2012
Front Cover (lower right): Boyle. Front view of 240mm howitzer of Battery `B',
697th Field Artillery Battalion, just before firing into German held territory.
Mignano area, Italy. January 30, 1944. U.S. National Archives and Records
Administration. Washington D.C. National Archives. Web. April 20, 2012
Title Page: Franklin. American howitzers shell German forces retreating near
Carentan, France. July 11, 1944. U.S. National Archives and Records
Administration. College Park. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 22, 2012.
p.1: Wilkes (Sgt.). No 5 Army Film & Photographic Unit. British troops loading
rocket projectiles in preparation for the offensive in the Reichswald, Germany.
February 8, 1945. Imperial War Museum. London. Wikimedia Commons. Web.
May 21, 2012. This artistic work created by the United Kingdom Government is in
the public domain.
p.7: Dawson (Sgt.). No 2 Army Film & Photographic Unit. A 4.2-inch mortar
of 'S' Troop, 307th Battery, 99th Light Anti-Aircraft Regiment, in action with the
mortar for the first time, at Cassino, Italy. May 12, 1944. Imperial War Museum.
London. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 21, 2012. This artistic work created by
the United Kingdom Government is in the public domain.
p.12: U. S. Army. Battle of the Bulge - Troops of the 82nd Airborne Division
advance in a snowstorm behind the tank in a move to attack Herresbach, Belgium.
340th Tank Battalion, Headquarters Company, 3rd Battalion, 504th Parachute
Regiment, 82nd Airborne Division. January 28, 1945. U.S. Army Center of
Military History. Web. May 24, 2012
p.15: Wagner. Polen, Straßenkampf, Infanterie. September 1939. Das
Bundersarchiv. Koblenz. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 22, 2012. Attribution:
Bundesarchiv, Bild 101I-012-0037-23A / Wagner / CC-BY-SA. http://cre-
ativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/de/deed.en
p.18: Polish Carpathian Brigade in Palestine, cavalry. 1940. Source: Witold
Bieganski: Szczurami Tobruku ich zwali, LSW Warszawa 1988, ISBN 83-205-
3955-2. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 15, 2012. All photographs by Polish pho-
tographers published without a clear copyright notice before the law was changed on
May 23, 1994 are assumed public domain.
p.19: U.S. Army. German WWII S-Mine or Boucing Betty. Wikimedia Commons.
Web. June 25, 2012.
p.22: SC 194 203-S Tanks, a few miles fro (sic) the German border demonstrate a
flame thrower mounted in a tank, which can be used against German fortifications.
September 13, 1944. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration.
Washington, D.C. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 24, 2012
p.25: Members of the 2d Infantry Division advance under machine gun fire into the
outskirts of Brest, France. September 9, 1944. U.S. Army Center of Military
History. Web. May 24, 2012
p.28: Knorring. Red Army soldiers firing at the enemy near Moscow. October 1,
1941. Source: RIA Novosti archive, image #67349, http://visualrian.ru/ru/-
site/gallery/#67349 35 mm film. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 24, 2012.
Attribution: RIA Novosti archive, image #67349 / Knorring / CC-BY-SA 3.0.
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/de/deed.en
p.30: U.S. Soldiers at Bougainville (Solomon Islands). March 1944. U.S. National
Archives and Records Administration. Washington, D.C.. National Archives.
Web. May 21, 2012.
p.32: Christie (Sgt.) No 5 Army Film & Photographic Unit. THE BRITISH
ARMY IN THE NORMANDY CAMPAIGN 1944. A Cromwell tank leads a
column of armour from 4th County of London Yeomanry, 7th Armoured Division
inland from Gold Beach. June 7, 1944. Imperial War Museum. London.
David Hicks (Order #16483250)
Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 24, 2012. This artistic work created by the United
Kingdom Government is in the public domain.
p.36: Scrippens, Pvt. Joseph. Soldiers of the 55th Armored Infantry Battalion and
tank of the 22nd Tank Battalion, move through smoke filled street. Wernberg,
Germany. April 22, 1945. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration.
College Park. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 22, 2012.
p.41: Roberts, U.S. Army. With German shells screaming overhead, American
Infantrymen seek shelter behind a tank. In the background can be seen the ruins of
the town of Geich, Germany, which is still under heavy shelling. December 11, 1944.
Source: U.S. Defenseimagery.mil photo VIRIN: HD-SN-99-02749 [1], U.S.
National Archives photo 111-SC-197261 [2] Wikimedia Commons. Web. May
21, 2012.
p.45: Finnish artillery on Puutsaari in Ladoga in the Continuation War.
November 1941. Source MaveTeam (http://mave.foorumi.eu). Wikimedia
Commons. Web. May 21, 2012. This photograph is in the public domain, because
either 50 years has elapsed from the year of creation or the photograph was first pub-
lished before 1966 (Finnish copyright law of 2005)
p.47: Capra, Frank. AMR 35 light tanks. 1943. Source: Divide and Conquer
(Why We Fight #3) Public Domain (U.S. War Department):
http://www.archive.org/details/DivideAndConquer. Wikimedia Commons.
Web. May 21, 2012.
p.51: Zwilling, Ernst. A. Nordafrika, Rommel in Befehlsfahrzeug. June 1942. Das
Bundersarchiv. Koblenz. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 24, 2012. Attribution:
Bundesarchiv, Bild 101I-443-1589-07 / Zwilling, Ernst A. / CC-BY-SA.
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/de/deed.en
p.57: Type 3 Chi-Nu tanks of the 4th Tank Division, with a few of the Type 3 Ho-Ni
self-propelled guns among them. 1945. Source: Andrzej M. Tomczyk Japonska
bron pancerna Vol. 4. - AJ Press, 2005 (TankPower ? 12). - ISBN 8-37237-167-
9. Wikimedia Commons. Web. May 21, 2012. This photographic image was pub-
lished before December 31st 1956, or photographed before 1946 and not published for
10 years thereafter, under jurisdiction of the Government of Japan. Thus this photo-
graphic image is considered to be public domain according to article 23 of old copy-
right law of Japan and article 2 of supplemental provision of copyright law of Japan.
p.60: T-60. Wikimedia Commons. Web. July 2, 2012. Permission: PD-RUSSIA-
2008. This work is in the public domain in Russia according to article 6 of Law No.
231-FZ of the Russian Federation of December 18, 2006; the Implementation Act for
Book IV of the Civil Code of the Russian Federation.
p.63: T-26 light tank during the Battle of Moscow. Winter 1941/1942. Wikimedia
Commons. Web. May 15, 2012. Permission: PD-RUSSIA-2008. This work is in the
public domain in Russia according to article 6 of Law No. 231-FZ of the Russian
Federation of December 18, 2006; the Implementation Act for Book IV of the Civil
Code of the Russian Federation.
p.69: Boyle. Front view of 240mm howitzer of Battery `B', 697th Field Artillery
Battalion, just before firing into German held territory. Mignano area, Italy.
January 30, 1944. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration.
College Park. National Archives. Web. May 21, 2012.
p.85: U. S. Army. German troops in Russia. 1941. U.S. National Archives and
Records Administration. College Park. National Archives. Web. May 21, 2012.
p.92: Clements (Lieut), No 1 Army Film & Photographic Unit. THE BRITISH
ARMY IN NORTH AFRICA 1941. Crusader tanks moving to forward positions in
the Western Desert.November 26, 1941. Imperial War Museum. London.
Wikimedia Commons. Web. June 12, 2012. This artistic work created by the United
Kingdom Government is in the public domain.
p.96: Moosmüller. Nordafrika, Panzer III. March 1941. Das Bundersarchiv.
Koblenz. Wikimedia Commons. Web. June 11, 2012. Attribution: Bundesarchiv,
Bild 101I-782-0016-32A / Moosmüller / CC-BY-SA. http://creativecommons.-
org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/de/deed.en
p.100: Koch. Russland, bei Pokrowka, Kradschützen. June 1943. Das
Bundersarchiv. Koblenz. Wikimedia Commons. Web. June 11, 2012. Attribution:
Bundesarchiv, Bild 101I-219-0553A-16 / Koch / CC-BY-SA. http://creativecom-
mons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/de/deed.en
David Hicks (Order #16483250)